Kr\ J
\ '
V> \
SSfsJ
Mimfr
-J
t
' -)
• • 9 •
rfl
« '
ENGLISH EDITION
OF
A. IVANOFF'S
EUSSIAN GEAMMAE.
(A. IVANOFFS)
RUSSIAN GRAMMAR
(IQtk EDITION— U5tk THOUSAND).
TRANSLATED, ENLARGED, AND ARRANGED
FOR THE
USE OF ENGLISH STUDENTS OF THE RUSSIAN
LANGUAGE
BY
WALTER E. GOWAN,
MAJOK IN HEH MAJESTY'S INDIAN ABUT.
LONDON : KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH & CO., i, PATERNOSTER SQUARE,
1882.
LONDON :
FEINTED BY GILBERT AND BIYINGTON, LIMITED, ST. JOHN'S SQUARE, CLEEKENWELL.
THE ENGLISH EDITION OP THIS GRAMMAR 18, BY GRACIOUS PERMISSION,
MOST RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED
TO HER ROYAL AND IMPERIAL HIGHNESS
MARIE ALEXANDROVNA, DUCHESS OP EDINBURGH,
AND
IMPERIAL PRINCESS OP RUSSIA.
TABLE OF CONTENTS (OaaweHie).
FA.OB
J. HE FACE . « • . . « • • • • • • . Vll
y . face xi
NOTE ON THE RUSSIAN LANGUAGE ix
RUSSIAN, ENGLISH, AND GREEK ALPHABETS
CLASSIFICATION OF RUSSIAN LETTERS .
RUSSIAN LETTERS AND THEIR SOUNDS . . . . . xi — xx
/PERMUTATION OF RUSSIAN LETTERS xxi
EPENTHESIS, OR INSERTION OF LETTERS ... .^
PROSTHESIS, OR PREFIXING OF LETTERS . . * . . xxi
f & APOCOPE, OR ABRIDGMENT OF VOWELS, &c. . . . . . xxjj
SYNCOPE, OR CONTRACTION OF WORDS BY STRIKING OUT LETTERS' CLASSIFICATION OF RUSSIAN WORDS ...... xxii
RUSSIAN WORDS TRACEABLE TO ROOTS xxii
ROOTS OF REGULAR RUSSIAN VERBS . . . . . xxiii
INTRODUCTION 1
FIRST PART: — »
ETYMOLOGY 1 — 4
THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE 4 — 26
THE NOUN ADJECTIVE . 26 — 39
THE NOUN OF NUMBER OR NUMERAL .... 39 — 45
THE PRONOUN 45 — 51
THE VERB 51—78
THE ADVERB 78—81
THE PREPOSITION 81, 82
THE CONJUNCTION 82, 83
THE INTERJECTION 83
( vi )
PAGB
SECOND PABT : — ••
SYNTAX .
PBOPOSITIONS
THEIE PEINCIPAL PAETS
THEIE SECONDABY PAETS , . . -
THE CONSTEUCTION OF A PEOPOSITION .
THE SIGNIFICATION OF A PBOPOSITION .
THE DIVEBSITY OF EXPEESSION IN A PEOPOSITION
CONSTEUCTION OF COMPOUND PEOPOSITIONS .
PEBIODICAL AND BEOKEN SPEECH ....
CONCOED OF WOEDS
GOVEENMENT OF WOEDS . ,.
EMPLOYMENT OF CASES WITHOUT PEEPOSITIONS EMPLOYMENT OF CASES WITH PBEPOSITIONS .
DlSTEIBUTION OF WOEDS
MAEKS OF PUNCTUATION
THIED PAET: —
OETHOGEAPHY
EMPLOYMENT OF CAPITAL LETTEES
EMPLOYMENT OF SMALL LETTEBS ....
PBOPEE USE OF SEPAEATE WOEDS
THE HYPHEN
DISJOINTING OF WOBDS
CONTBACTION OF WOBDS
} 84—90
90—93
93—101
94—99
99—101
101—104
104—108
108
108—110
11O-118
118, 119
119, 120
120
120
PREFACE.
IN the belief that, amongst the gradually increasing number of English officers who are recognizing the importance of the study of Russian, a demand exists for a Modern Russian Grammar, it occurred to me that I might profitably devote some time and labour, during my leave from India, towards endeavouring to pro- vide for this want.
The method of setting about such a task seemed to me to be one of two : — 1st. I might either compile, from the few existing works in the Russian and English languages, a guide of the kind required, and thereby produce that which would of necessity be imperfect, and at the same time far from original. 2nd. Or I might take a practical work, by a recognized Russian Grammarian, and try and adapt it to the special requirements of English Students of the Russian Language.
The latter course I have endeavoured to follow, and the scope of the enlargement and arrangement of the Russian Grammar, which I have selected for the purpose, may be thus explained : —
The original text, having been written by a Russian for Russians contains no Alphabet, or explanations of the various sounds of the several letters. Essentials under this and other heads have been supplied in the first twenty pages of the English edition.
Russian words occurring throughout the English text have been
( viii )
accentuated,1 so as to ensure, as far as possible, a correct pro- nunciation.
The final letters or syllables of words, marking the changes to which each is subject either through declension or conjugation, have been printed in a different type, so that the radical letters may stand out more clearly. Prefixes have been similarly dealt with. The principle of reducing every simple and compound word to a root has been thus kept in view.
Mr. Henri Biola, Professor of Russian at the Staff College, has been good enough to help in the revision of the pages of a Grammar which it is hoped will be of use in enabling Englishmen (and especially English officers) to become better acquainted with the language of a great and growing country.
W. E. G.
1 N.B. — Russian words in this Grammar which begin with capital letters, and which are unaccented, take the accent on the initial letter.
( fc
NOTE.
THE Russian language is a dialect of the Slavonian, the common tongue of a large family of nations descended from the Scythians, but whose earlier origin is unascertained. Many of the modern roots are Sanscrit, Greek,1 Latin, and German. The spoken language incorporated many words from the Polish and other Slavonian dialects, the Tartar and Mongolian. The written character is a very neat one ; and the printed has much resemblance to the Greek, some also to the Latin. The Alphabet is as nearly phonetic as can be desired, and has the advantage of expressing complex consonantal sounds. That Russian literature" has not yet contributed its full quota to the great hive of human learning should be mainly ascribed to over-government, to its being yet in the youth of its exist- ence, and still in a condition which compels it to borrow much. When civiliza- tion shall have taken firm root in all classes, then Russia will no doubt enlarge her pretensions ; but the time is corning, and the minds to do the work are ripening. — Extract from the " Encyclopedia Britannica"
1 In the 9th century, two Greek Missionaries were sent into Moravia by the Byzantian Emperor, Michael III., to translate the Bible, and other theological works, into Slavonian. Finding letters unknown to the inhabitants, they composed an Alphabet after the model of the Greek, with a few additional characters, to express the sounds peculiar to the Slavonian language. — Extract from the Introduction to " Heard1 s Practical Grammar o the Russian Language" St. Petersburg, 1827.
RUSSIAN LETTERS AND THEIR SOUNDS.
VOWELS l AND SEMI- VOWELS.
|
English letters. |
English words. |
|
,4 |
are, far. |
|
U |
am, fat. |
|
r |
own, alone. |
|
u |
fate. |
(1) The hard vowel A, a, is represented by
The ordinary sound of the Russian a is that of d : Ex. M«TB, mother, pronounced mat*.
It has also the sound of a when found at the end of certain words and not accented : Ex. 6a6a, old woman, pronounced baba.
In the inflection aio of adjectives, if it be accented, its sound is that of d : Ex. cyxaro, gen. of cyxoa, dry, pronounced sookhova.
NOTE. — When it is unaccented, and follows certain consonants (JK, H, in, m), its sound is that of d: Ex. jK#pa, heat; H«CBI, hours; lUfluyirb, a wag ; maiKy, I spare, from m«^HTB ; pronounced j«ra, tchasoui, shaloon, shtshoj'od.
English letters.
English words.
ya or ya yard, yarrow.
The soft vowel fl, n, is represented by-J i
a made.
•a solar.
"When it is accented, and in any part of a word or syllable, its sound is that of yea : Ex. yhia, ditch ; M/ZCO, meat ; 3ap/z, dawn : pro- nounced y«ma, myaso, zarya.
When not accented, and at the end of words, its sound is that of y« : Ex. BpeM/z, time, pronounced vremya.
1 In the pronunciation of Russian vowels it should be noticed whether the word in which they occur is isolated, whether the vowel itself is accented, and whether it begins a syllable.
When not accented, and at the beginning of words or syllables, its sound is that of ye: Ex. /Zflpo, kernel; 4eB#rt, nine: pronounced ^dro, dev^tft*.
After a consonant, and not accented, it has the sound of a : Ex. BflJKy, I tie (from Basalt), pronounced vdjoo.
The letter H, in the suffix en, of pronominal and other verbs, is pronounced sa : Ex. ciapait^, to endeavour ; represented thus — staratsfl.
English English
letter. words.
(3) The hard vowel B, 9, is represented by e f enmity>
(let.
This letter, and not e, is used at the beginning of certain Russian words, and of foreign words in use in the Russian language, and also after a vowel : Ex. aa ! ho ! axt ! hey ! S'TOTB, this, &c. ; aKBaiopt, the Equator ; no^Tt, poet ; pronounced ei, gkh. <?tot, tfkvator, potft.
English English
letters. words.
ye yes.
yo yoke,
yo yonder.
6 sop.
i sit.
e spell.
(4) The soft vowel E, e, is represented by
At the commencement of words or syllables, and after a vowel, its sound is that Q^ ye: Ex. euva, scarcely; BCJHKOe, great (neut. form of BaJHRia) : pronounced y<?dva and 0eleekqy£
When it is accented it takes the sound of yd or yo : Ex. &IKE, a fir-tree ; iB^'pAO, firmly ; pronounced ydlka and tvyorda.
In such cases in this Grammar it will be found marked with two dots instead of the ordinary accent mark.
When accented, and found after the consonants w, u, w, 114 and ^, it has the sound of 8: Ex. JK£IHB, gall, pronounced joltch*, and marked as above indicated.
After a consonant, when not accented, its sound is that of i : Ex. HteHa, wife, pronounced jifna.
After a consonant (other than those specified above), when accented, its sound is that of e : Ex. CM^pib, death ; c^p^ue, heart ; pronounced sm#rtr and smltse.
NOTE. — The vowel e is used, instead of 9, in the following Russian words : — npo^Kn., project ; pe^cipt, register ; tf#ecT>, sword- hilt ; etfpeHiop'L, a corporal, &c. ; which are pronounced pro£kt, re^str, ^fes, <?freitor, &c.
(5) The hard vowel LI, bi, has no exact equivalent in English. It has a hollow or muffled sound, and its true pronunciation can only be seized by hearing it from the mouth of a Russian.
After the letters 6, <?, M, rc, $£, its sound resembles the French oui pronounced very shortly, or that of the English we : Ex. rpn6&/ (plur. of rpii6T», a mushroom) : 6bi, you ; MM, we ; cnonw (plur. of cnom>, a sheaf) : pronounced gribo^*, voui, mom, snap0wz, &c.
After other consonants its sound is that of the English uee : Ex. Cbmt, a son, pronounced sueen.
NOTE. — This vowel may always be distinguished from u by its thicker sound. It occurs in the genitive case singular, and nominative case plural, of substantives ending in a, and in the nominative, plural, of those ending in ff.
English English
letters. words.
f ^ *11
1 ill.
(6) The soft vowel u is represented by the J ra*
ye
oui
Its ordinary sound at the commencement of words and syllables is that of i : Ex. M#TH, to go ; pronounced z'dtee : and also in the word MWpT>, peace, pronounced nur.
At the commencement of certain cases of the pronoun of the third person it bears the sound of a diphthong: Ex. %xt, of them, theirs, pronounced cekh.
After the semi-vowel &, it has the sound of ye : Ex. ciara* (plur. of ciaiBfl, an article), pronounced statye.
NOTE 1. — After a preposition ending in », it takes the thicker sound of bi : Ex. npe^&w^ymiH, preceding, pronounced pred<w- dooshtshii, &c. Indeed, some writers substitute the letter bi for the combined letters 5w shown in the above example.
NOTE 2. — Many writers retain u in all words composed of the preposition npu and a word commencing with a vowel: Ex. npwofimaxfc, to communicate ; npwixaTL, to arrive, &c. But it is more regular to change tlie « into i, and to write such words thus : np/oSmaii, and npeixaiB, &c.
English English
letter. words.
(7) The soft vowel /, », is represented by the i
Its ordinary sound is that of the English i : Ex. JH.MH, lily, pro- nounced leelfya.
Before a consonant this vowel is only met with in one word in the whole of the Russian language, viz. M?'pt, universe, pronounced nur, and which should not be confounded with the word Mttpt, peace (see second illustration of the ordinary sound of u).
NOTE 1. — The vowel i is used instead of u, of which it is, indeed, a shorter form, before all vowels and before the semi- vowel u : Ex. cie (neut. form of ceil, this or that) : npeyqaiL, to accustom ; npziiTHbiH, agreeable ; remn, genius, &c.
NOTE 2. — The letters u and * are exactly similar in sound; the first is used before consonants, and the second before vowels : Ex. A(wmHa, a valley ; /mb, July ; MijtH^qa, a mill ; Hieme, reading ; BMUiHfl, a cherry; HacHJiee, violence.
English English letters. words.
f 6 no.
(8) The hard vowel 0, o, is represented by < 6 not.
C & was.
The ordinary sound of this letter is that of the English o or 8 : Ex. flOMa, of a house, or the idiom for " at home ;" KOJOKOJT., a bell : pronounced doma and kolokol.
When, however, it occurs in a syllable upon which the accent does not fall, its pronunciation is that of the English a : Ex. xopoiiio, well, pronounced Marasho.
English English letters. word.
(9) The hard vowel Y, y> is represented by oo moon.
The sound of this letter resembles that of the English do or 08 Ex. 6ypfl, tempest ; r^6a, creek, bay ; pronounced biwrya and gooba.
English English letters. words.
(LO) The soft vowel 10, H>, is represented by
At the beginning of words or syllables the sound of this letter i that of the English y u : Ex. wrt, south, pronounced .yr/g.
At the end, or in the middle, of words or syllables, its sound is that of the English u : JEx. Moftjiw, I love, pronounced \ub\u.
(11) The medium vowel #, /&, has for the most part the same sounds as the Russian E, e (see above, letter No. 4), viz. that of the following1 English letters : ye in the word yes, and of yo or yeo in the words yoke or yonder and y<?<?man, and also that of ay in the word may.
At the commencement, and sometimes in the middle, of words and syllables, its sound is that of ye : Ex. /&CTb, to eat ; H/&n>, no, not ; pronounced yest1 and ny<?tt.
When accented it has the sound of yeo only in the words 3B/&3£bi (plur. of 3fii>3Aa, a star) ; rn/b3^a (plur. of rflfe^o, a nest) ; crapa (plnr. ofci>A.i6, a saddle), &c., and their derivatives; pronounced zvy#5zdwi, gn^ozda, sy<?odla. Also UB/6.n>, past tense of UBiiCTH, to blossom ; o6p/&.n>, past tense of o6pi>CTH, to acquire ; pronounced tsv^ol and abr^tfol, &c.
When accented and at the end, and sometimes in the middle, of a word or syllable, its sound is that of ay : Ex. Ha cmi/6, on the table (from CTO.ii)) ; B/&pa, faith ; pronounced na stolay and vdyra.
NOTE. — As a general rule, it may be observed that when a primitive word or root is written with rc>, that vowel is retained in all its derivatives.
(12, 13, 14) The semi- vowels &, &, w, have no separate sounds of their own.
Siffce no Russian word can end with a consonant, the hard or soft semi-vowel, "6 or &, forms the termination of such as do not end with a vowel : Ex. rjar6^5, a verb ; BiiB&, a branch, &c.
The hard semi-vowel 5, though mute, gives to the consonant which precedes it a strong and dry sound, as though it were double. It causes, too, a feeble consonant to be articulated like its corresponding strong consonant: Ex. CTaH8, stage, station; BH3&, elm ; KpOBS, roof; inecitf, pole, perch ; 6pai&, brother, &c. ; pronounced stann, vya$s} krq^*, shes^, bra^.
In the prefixes, into the composition of which the hard semi- vowel & enters, it is only retained before the vowels e, u, /&, TO, u : Ex. oosmHBHtiH, objective; Bff/6xaiB, to enter; npw^ymiH, pre- ceding ; a4570Tafln>, aide-de-camp ; ofo/ZBHTB, to announce, &c.
The soft semi- vowel 6 may be said to be a modified form of u. It gives to the consonant which precedes it a soft and liquid sound : Ex. cian&, arise (imp. mood of ciaHOBHTLca) ; BS3&, swamp, band ;
KPOB&, blood; mecT&, six; 6pai&, to take; pronounced staw1, vyaz*, kro0*, shes^, bra/, leaving the original sound of the final u to melt away in the mouth. In the middle of a word or syllable the same process takes place.
NOTE 1. — The semi-vowel & cannot be placed either after the guttural letters t, K, x, or the liquid 14. It may appear, however, after any of the other consonants, and that, too, in the middle of a word : Ex. Bec&Ma, very ; CKOJ&KO, how much, how many, &c.
NOTE 2. — When the letter A occurs before the termination nymi>, the soft semi- vowel & is inserted : Ex. KOJOTB, to pierce, KOJ&nyTL ; cipkiflTb, to fire, CTpiM&HyTB, &c.
NOTE 3. — The importance of distinguishing between the hard and soft semi-vowels & and & will be seen by a reference to the following words, the signification of which depends on the pro- nunciation of the final consonant: —
6pai5, brother; 6pai&, to take.
Bass, an elm ; BH3&, a bog, band.
K.iaA5, a treasure ; KjaA&, cargo.
KpOBff, a roof; KpOB&, blood.
Mai5, mate (at chess) ; Max&, mother,
nepers, a finger; nepci&, earth.
j, a raft ; IUOT&, flesh.
5, heat; DBU&, dust.
CTO.I&, a table; CTOJ&, so much.
}fro.i5, a corner; ^roj&, coal (charcoal),
i^ntf, a flail ; U^n&, a chain.
IH6CT&, a pole ; ineci&, six.
merojtf, a goldfinch ; meroJ&, a f°P«
&c., &c.
The soft semi-vowel u is always found after a vowel, and is but a shortened form of u. Its pronunciation is very brief, and, in con- junction with the vowel which precedes it, it forms but one syllable : Ex. &<m, give (imp. mood of ^aBaib) ; MO&, my, mine ; pronounced dar, mo*, &c.
CONSONANTS.1
(15) The labial and strong consonant J7, n> is in sound similar to the English p : Ex. rco/n>, a priest, pronounced j»o#e.
1 In the pronunciation of Russian consonants, it should be observed whether the following vowel is hard or soft, and whether such vowel terminates the wcrd cr syllable.
( xvii )
(16) The ordinary sound of the feeble consonant B, 6, is that of the English I.
It moreover takes the sound of its corresponding strong consonant n at the end of words or syllables terminating with the hard semi- vowel » and before any strong consonant : Ex. 6o<ft> bean ; otfrnpaTh, to rub round ; pronounced bopp and ajotirat*.
(17) The sound of the labial and strong consonant (p is that of the English /or ph : Ex. ^panrt, a beau or fop, pronounced /rant.
(18) The ordinary sound of the labial and feeble consonant B, e, is that of the English v : Ex. fiipa, faith, pronounced payra.
It, moreover, takes the sound of its corresponding strong consonant $ at the end of words or syllables terminating with the hard semi- vowel g and before any strong consonant : Ex. pOtfT), ditch ; tfiiiopHHirb, Tuesday ; pronounced roff and /tornik.
(19) The ordinary sound of the guttural and strong consonant K, Ky is that of the English k and of e in certain examples.
Moreover, before the feeble consonants 6, d, m, 3, it takes the sound of its corresponding feeble consonant i : Ex. /TL Bory, to God ; Afb floftpy, to the good ; /n> 3eMai>, towards the earth ; pronounced //'bohoo, ^dabroo, ^zemlay, &c.
Before the strong, consonants K, m, v, it receives the aspirated articulation of x : Ex. «r> KOMy ? towards whom ? /fro ? who ? KG y ? towards whom ? — pronounced ^omoo, ^to, ^tchemoo, &c.
(20) At the beginning, and in the middle, of certain words the guttural and feeble consonant F9 ^, preserves the sound of the English cj : Ex. ^pOM•b, thunder; aepSt, coat of arms; enCiHy, I will perish ; pronounced $rom, ^erb, ^eebnoo.
It has also other sounds. At the end of words and before the consonant m it takes the sound of its corresponding strong consonant K : Ex. MOZT», I could (from MOIL), pronounced mo/£.
It is aspirated in the following words : B6^a, of God ; /"ocno/jb, Lord ; 6.iaeo, good, well ; pronounced B6^a\, .Saspod1, bla^o.
In the words Eozt, God, y66tt (it is) wretched; also before a strong consonant (#, m, n, &c.), and in foreign words ending in ptt, such as CTpac6yjtM5, Strasbtfwy, it takes the aspirated sound of the strong consonant x, which may be represented by kJi. Hence the above words are pronounced BoH, oobo^, StrasbourM.
In the terminations cno, Hto, ow and eio of adjectives arid of
b
( xviii )
pronouns, its sound is that of the English v : Ex. Kpaceazo, of red ; CHHJMO, of blue ; o^HC^o, of one ; Bcezo, of all ; pronounced krasnava, seenya^a, adnavo, vsevo.
In foreign words adopted in the Russian language it is pronounced either as the English g or k, according to the sound of the letter which it replaces : Ex. ^pa^ia, grace ; ^6c^HTaJB, hospital ; pronounced yratsiya, hospital .
(21) The sound of the guttural and strong consonant X, x, is that of kh :l Ex. 0paivn>, temple, church ; pronounced Mramm.
(22) The ordinary sound of the dental and strong consonant T, m, is that of the English t : Ex. me-iira, a cart or waggon, pro- nounced felayga.
Before the feeble consonants 6, i, d, OK, 3, this letter takes the sound of its corresponding feeble consonant d : Ex. 6mj£Lri, I have surrendered ; O^SLIBT., recall ; pronounced o^r/al ; odzwiff.
In words wherein cm is followed by «, the letter m is not pro- nounced : Ex. nocmubiu, abstinent; ^acm H bin, private ; pronounced posnwii, tchasnwii.
(23) The ordinary sound of the dental and feeble consonant /f, d, is that of the English d : Ex. doMi>, a house, pronounced ^om.
This letter, moreover, takes the sound of its corresponding strong consonant m at the end of words and syllables terminating with the hard semi-vowel 5, and when found before any strong consonant : Ex. ca<fa>, garden ; BO^Ka, brandy or whiskey ; pronounced sat^, votfka.
In words wher,ein 3d is followed by /«, the letter d is not pronounced : Ex. noadHO, late, (adv.) npaadflHKT,, holiday ; pro- nounced pozna, praznik.
(24) The buzzing or hissing an'd strong consonant /Z7, ?^, resembles in sound the compound English letter sh \ Ex. WKa^-b, cupboard, pronounced &£kaff.
(25) The ordinary sound of the buzzing or hissing and feeble consonant IK, OK, is that of the compound English letter zh, or the French j : Ex. iwc^v, I wait (from w/jaTb) ; MyoKn., husband ; JOJ/ca, butt ; pronounced zMoo, moo;', %'ka.
This letter, however, takes the sound of its corresponding strong
1 There are no English words that properly exemplify the very guttural sound of the Russian x, but the sound of ch in the Mcotch word loch is very like it.
consonant m at the end of words and syllables terminating with the hard semi-vowel V, and when found before any strong consonant : Ex. HOa/et, knife; KpprcKa, tankard, jug; pronounced no^, kroo^ka.
(26) The ordinary sound of the hissing and strong consonant C, c, is that of the English * : Ex. cecipa, sister, pronounced sestra.
Before the feeble consonants 6, i} d, w, 3, this letter takes the sound of its corresponding feeble consonant 3 : Ex. £6opT», collection ; £ropi>Ti>, to burn ; c^ait, to surrender ; OHtHMaiB, to compress ; pro- nounced rbor, ^orat*, zdatf, 2/imat*.
Before tu and u this letter takes the hissing sound of w : Ex. , to sew together; CHaciie, prosperity ; pronounced
(27) The ordinary sound of the hissing and feeble consonant 3, 3, is that of the English z : E«J. SBOHT*, ringing (sound), pronounced
This letter also takes the sound of its corresponding strong consonant c at the end of words or syllables terminating with the hard semi-vowel 5, and when it is found before any strong con- sonant: Ex. B03i, a load; CKa^Ka, tale, fable; pronounced voss; skaska.
NOTE. — The 3 of the particles H3, B03, pas, is changed into c when the word with which they are to be connected begins with a hard consonant : —
Ex. H3 . . . HCipe6HTB, to destroy.
BOS . . . BOCKpecenie, resurrection. pas . . . pacneMaiaib, to unseal.
(28) The sound of the lingual and strong consonant JJ, ^, is that of the compound English letter ts : Ex. i{apb, Tsar or Russian Emperor's title; nepeifb, pepper; pronounced &aV, perefc.
(29) The sound of the buzzing or hissing and strong consonant */, u, is that of the compound English letters ck or tch : Ex. ^en^HKt, cap or cowl, pronounced tck&ptcMk.
In the word uio, what that, (pronounced s^to), and before the consonant u, the same letter takes the sound of tu : Ex* napo^HO, designedly, pronounced naros^na.
The word TO^HO exactly, is, however, pronounced to^na, to dis- tinguish it from TOIWHO, to have nausea, pronounced tos/ma.
(30) The sound of the buzzing or hissing and strong consonant
Uf, % is that of the compound English letters shch or shtsh : Ex. t^tiib, shield, pronounced shtsheet1.
Before the consonant H the same letter has the simple sound of lit : Ex. noMOHiBflK-B, assistant, pronounced pamo^nik.
(31) The sound of the palatal and liquid consonant J[, j, is approximately that of the English l\ Ex. AOJT>, dale, valley; 6oJb, pain ; pronounced dol, bo^.
(32) The sound of the labial and liquid consonant M, M, is that of the English letter m : Esc. JuaiL, mother, pronounced ?^atY.
(33) The sound of the palatal and liquid consonant H, H, is that of the English n : Ex. waiut, our, ours ; OWT>, he ; pronounced ?/ash, on.
(34) The sound of the palatal and liquid consonant P, p, is that of the English r broadly articulated : Ex. j004T>, gender, race ; pro- nounced rod.
N.B. — The letters r} &, have been omitted from these observations, because the first is practically obsolete, whilst the use of the second" is confined to a few words only, taken from the Greek, in which its sound may be represented by the English letters th. Explanation, moreover, of the sounds of the letter r will be found in § 8, page 2, of the Grammar.
Although an endeavour has been made to explain the pronun- ciation of the Russian letters, it must be confessed that all attempts to express the sounds of one language by the characters of another are imperfect, oral instruction being the only sure means of acquiring a correct pronunciation.
CHANGES WHICH RUSSIAN LETTERS UNDERGO.
Most of the apparent irregularities of Russian Etymology being founded upon the mutability of the letters, the Student is advised to pay particular attention to that part of the Grammar which treats of their changes and reciprocal effect upon each other in the formation of derivatives, and in the declension and modification of words. These changes will explain the omission of some rules that are to be found in other Grammars, but which are rendered superfluous by a knowledge of the more fundamental rules relating to the letters.
( xxi )
PERMUTATION OF RUSSIAN VOWELS, SEMI-VOWELS, AND CONSONANTS, SUBJECT TO THE VARIOUS RULES OP DERIVATION, DECLENSION, AND CONJUGATION.
VOWELS AND SEMI- VOWELS.
change into
1. H
2. T,
3. b and fi
4. a
5. K)
6. bi
7. e
8. o
9. t 10. b
11. r
12. A
13. 3
14. K
15. T
16. ii
17. x
18. c
19. CK
20. CT.
EPENTHESIS.
Epenthesis, or the insertion of a letter in the middle of a word, is exemplified as follows : (a) the vowels o and e are inserted between two consonants at the end of words : Ex. oroiib, fire; Btepi>; wind ; — (b) the consonant Ji is inserted after the letters 6, e, M, n, $, when they would otherwise be followed by TO or e: Ex. JU06./7K), I love (from jiioouTb) ; Aemeiue, cheaper (from ^emeuo), &c. ; — (c) the consonant H is prefixed to the pronoun of the third person when it stands after a preposition or an adverb : Ex. y «ero, he had ; , against them.
change into
|
i 1 [ any other vowel, o ; before I any two consonants. |
|||
|
3 |
e j a N . y |
any consonant. ; r, K, x, at, 4, in, in, U. |
|
|
ii |
r, K, x, JK, 4, in, m. |
||
|
0 |
i after ^ |
r, K, x. |
|
|
e |
JK, 4, in, m, U- |
||
|
n |
i. |
||
|
H t |
any vowel. |
||
|
CONSONANTS. |
|||
|
\ i" |
/ H \T I. M> 1> b' j a, e, H, y, K), b. |
||
|
i |
H, K), b. |
||
|
>< |
r !- |
before ' |
H, e, H, y, K), b. e, B, v, b. .,„-, |
|
}••} |
H, e, H, y, w, b. J |
( xxii )
PROSTHESIS.
Prosthesis is the placing- of a letter at the beginning of a word to facilitate pronunciation : Ex. 06ceMB, eight, instead of OCGML; , of rye, instead of
APOCOPE.
Apocope is the modifying of a vowel at the end of a word : Ex. HT06&, in order that, instead of HTo6&f ; CO MHOM, with me, instead of co MHOTO, &c.
SYNCOPE.
Syncope is the striking out of a letter from the middle of a word to facilitate or soften the pronunciation : Ex. nojTOpa, 1^, instead of nojffTOpa, &c.
CLASSIFICATION OF RUSSIAN WORDS.
•
All Russian words are either primitive (nepBOo6pa3HOtf) — Ex. cadT>, garden ; o? derivative (npOHSBOAHoe) — Ex. cfldoBHHKt, gardener; or compound (cJiowRoe) — Ex. c#doBo#CTBO, garden^ (from eadz, garden, and eod&mb, to conduct) .
RUSSIAN WORDS TRACEABLE TO ROOTS.
Every Russian word is, moreover, traceable to a root (KopeH&), or reducible to certain radical syllables or letters which become words by the junction of other syllables or letters. Roots may be divided into principal and secondary. From the principal (iMaBHBin) roots denominative words or parts of speech can be formed by the mere addition of a semi- vowel or a vowel : Ex. from the root end comes BH£&, sight ; from the root pyK comes pyKa, a hand. The secondary (npiuaTOHH&iH) roots are subdivided into, (a) initial (npeAtHAymm), which consist of auxiliary words or particles in unioji with other principal roots at the beginning of which they are placed. These are called prefixes or prepositions : Ex. y -xo#&, departure; 0m-Ka3&, refusal, &c. ; — (b] final (nocxfeAyiomm), or such as form the termination of other principal roots. These are called suffixes : Ex. BOfl-a, water, A^Ji-ami), to do, &c.
The roots of the following words can at once be traced after
( xxiii )
removing their prefixes and affixes, and then reducing compound words to derivative, and derivative to primitive, as seen above : —
np€H3tf&i»aoHecTBOBaTb, to superabound (root 6bim). 3ac0Mdi>Te.ibCTBOBaHie, attestation (root end). HeaatfMCHMOCTb, independence (root euc). HeH3JW/&/?MMbiH, immeasurable (root Mibp). npeAC/&daTe,ibCTBOBaTb, to preside (root end), cocmpadame, compassion (root cmpad).
, inventive faculty (root 6pjbm). , auxiliary (root MM).
H; satisfactory (root meop), &c.
ROOTS OF REGULAR RUSSIAN VERBS.
The root of regular Russian verbs can be ascertained by striking off the final letters nib of the infinite mood of the imperfect aspect, together with any of the preceding vowels #, u, n, o, y, e, n.
ERRATA.
|
Line |
For |
Bead |
Page |
Line |
For |
Read |
|
25 |
•lerKiS |
JerKiS |
54 |
3 |
nepenATH |
nepeiiiH |
|
33 |
nap^iie |
oaptiie |
55 |
33 |
noAyJt |
noAyJi |
|
23 |
ciapocry |
ciapocrb |
61 |
15 |
no0Ay |
noiiAy |
|
5 |
sepKaxb |
aepKaJT. |
62 |
18 |
pacKpaTHBaib |
pacKpauiHBaxb |
|
3£ |
PJ'KH |
PJKH |
63 |
12 |
vBOAa.ii |
yBH/itj^ |
|
36 |
pyKbi |
pyKbi |
j> |
39 |
CTyKHy-HHIb-HTb |
ciyKHy -euib -etT, |
|
14 |
in the oblique |
in this one |
-HMT, -Hie -yn> |
^-6Mi> -eie -yn> |
||
|
cases |
oblique case |
64 |
1 |
A'fe.iaii, %UBH |
A^ati, H;HBH |
|
|
9 |
MypaseBT> |
MypaebCBX |
» |
45 |
BHAUBclBIIjifi |
BH.lblBaBIlliu |
|
18 |
nyjKOB'b |
lyJKOB-b |
65 |
5 |
ci-iasi |
CA*JaBT, |
|
18 |
on |
in |
67 |
42 |
praising himself |
praising one's self |
|
20 |
MeAB'EHeHOK'b |
MeABtateHOKi |
68 |
3 |
yjbiOHyjuiHCb |
y.ibi(5aBiiiHCb |
|
22 |
.ibBc'iiHii and |
JbBe'HKH and |
69 |
44 |
o |
or |
|
MuirieiiKa |
HbinieHKH |
71 |
5 |
lisniaib |
'B3;i;aTb |
|
|
» |
.ibB.'tTa |
JbBaia |
72 |
18 |
prefixes |
aspects |
|
2 |
IiepKBH |
IU'PKBII |
74 |
31 |
work |
wink |
|
8 |
JJ |
»» |
76 |
16 |
CMOTpauiifica |
CMOTpamificH |
|
27 |
Bopo6b6a |
Bopodeft |
» |
22 |
bifl, aa, €6 |
biu, aa, oe |
|
4 |
K0ie.il |
Koxeji |
» |
37 |
by means of |
|
|
5 |
note |
knot |
either |
from either |
||
|
17 |
Baxopx, Biixpa |
Hnxop't, Biixpa |
78 |
9 |
force |
voice |
|
21 |
neufl |
neua |
>5 |
24 |
HIOCKOJbKO |
eicKOJbKO |
|
3 |
ceroAHaniHbift |
ceroABsinHifi |
1 M |
27 |
Becbta |
BCCbMa |
|
14 |
yctie'iiBbift |
yc'BieHHHfl |
79 |
1 |
npOBOJKAilTb |
npOBOAiiib |
|
18 |
Be-iMKT. -a -o |
BCJHKI -a -6 |
80 |
6 |
ee no, Bint not |
He not, H-BTI no |
|
16 |
•li'pilMil |
qe'pebiB |
?> |
15 |
TaKIIM'b |
Taui'iMb |
|
22 |
Hafi. HaH-iyqinia |
ean, naii.iy'iiuiii |
82 |
18 |
BlSA* |
B-BAb |
|
23 |
iiafifioj-Be |
naHOdj-Be |
84 |
28 |
adjective npo- |
past tense of |
|
6 |
oixe |
HH/K6 |
iii.n.iii |
iipoihii |
||
|
7 |
Haiuyqiiiift |
HaH-iyioiia |
88 |
10 |
not so |
not to |
|
8 |
HafixyAiiiitt |
iiauxyAuiiii |
» |
35 |
H^PBWMT, |
nepBbiMi |
|
19 |
ceciepi) |
ceciepi |
90 |
18 |
• |
a |
|
23 |
jj |
j> |
>» |
28 |
BOSOBnOBlI.IUCb |
B03o6nOBM.lHCb |
|
7 |
(UCHbarO |
o^^Hbefl |
91 |
6 |
Kalmucks, a |
Kalmucks arc a |
|
8 |
OJe'HbeMy |
» |
» |
23 |
•ioftiiffl |
iMiimuin |
|
28 |
ABa, sing., for |
ABa, siw,^., /or |
92 |
14 |
Poccifi |
Poccia |
|
all genders |
>wasc. & neut. |
'? |
20 |
M(i.Ibf)I,I |
MO.II-nbl |
|
|
29 |
AB1>, plnr. |
AB-B, ^em. |
93 |
2 |
cpaHu'niii |
Cpa/KGHlH |
|
2 |
HOIOB^BA |
no.iOBBiia |
» |
4 |
MHoatecBio |
MHOSteCTBO |
|
6 |
COOOK) |
coGoio |
94 |
8 |
ibe |
ibe |
|
12 |
-we -LIU |
-ie -ia |
» |
24 |
•••^pajiHuxft |
MHnepa^bewxT) |
|
11 |
»j jj |
» » |
95 |
14 |
co^HHeaia |
co4UHeuitt |
|
14 |
» j» |
» » |
» |
34 |
TpedoBaib |
ipeOoBarb |
|
8 |
6"HXblT> |
6nbIXT> |
97 |
2 |
BoiicKa |
BOflCKa |
|
3 |
1TO ? |
(qio) ? |
»j |
13 |
HtepTBOBHTb |
•/KepiBOBaTb |
|
25 |
medeieYb, p/Kerb |
meCeieTt, psteii |
5> |
18 |
aaB^AWBaHie |
saB'BAHBaHie |
|
27 |
Boexi |
BdeiT) |
98 |
25 |
MUJOCTbl |
MM.IOCTH |
|
28 |
Mbliaib |
MbliaTl |
99 |
29 |
MOpeMb |
Mdpe.Mi |
|
29 |
6.»eeii |
(U4en |
105 |
34 |
AJDbl |
AJbnw |
|
30 |
MaynaeTi |
MflyKaeiT. |
jj |
37 |
AjniHCKHXT. |
AJbniiiCKHXT. |
|
*5 |
Clillllbil |
CBHUbH |
107 |
28 |
Cd.iKue |
C6.inue |
|
31, |
xpiOKaeiT) |
xpwKaeiT, |
109 |
23 |
KOpojeBCKoe |
Kopo.ieBCKoe |
|
jj |
BOpKyeii |
BopnyeTT) |
110 |
18 |
HHCTHTyTT) |
HHCTHTyii |
|
32 |
KJOK^eTT. |
KJOXIGTI |
jj |
26 |
PdJKAeCTBO |
POJKA6CTBO |
|
33 |
KBaKaeii |
KBaKaerb |
« |
28 |
nOABHSKH |
IIO,U!f'l.'!KII |
|
34 |
HjyHJHtai^ |
jKVJKataTT. |
111 |
8 |
npoHiueCTBie |
n^oHcmecTBie |
|
35 |
atyjKHJar'b |
aty/K/Karb |
112 |
9 |
BtAiaie |
Bt>ACFiie |
|
30 |
CKpiinKt |
CKpUflKfi |
J5 |
67 |
*e.i'B3a |
jKe.rtaa |
INTRODUCTION.
§ 1. Russian Grammar elucidates those rules of the Russian language which should be adhered to, both in Conversation and in Writing.
§ 2. In order to correctly express our thoughts, we must know, (1) the proper use and meaning of words in all their inflections or changes ; (2) how to connect such words so that the sense of our expressions may be perfectly clear; (3) how to write words in con- formity with rules laid down by the best authors.
§ 3. Agreeably to the above requirements, Grammar divides itself into three parts : —
I. Etymology (CiOBonponsBefleHitf). II. Syntax (CjLOBOco4HHeme).
III. Orthography
FIEST PAET.
ETYMOLOGY.
§ 4. Under the head of Etymology are explained, (1) the deriva- tion (iipOHCXOJKAeHi'e), (2) the construction (cociaBtf), (3) the significa- tion (3Ha4em£), and (4) the changes (nepeMlma *) of words.
^ 5. A word may express any sort of idea or feeling : Ex. Apyrs friend, Mope sea, CKpoMHOCT& modesty, ^ofip&w good, kind, nfli& five,
1 All Russian words placed within brackets after English words are in their primary terminations. They are so placed in order to let the student see, without search, what are the corresponding Russian equivalents for such terms as are in common use in every grammar. Trans.
B
( 2 )
H I, VBaJKaib to consider, HHiatomeft l he who reads, 6ira/z 2 running-, aaeipa to-morrow, MeiK/jy amongst, between, cjiflOBaTCJ&HO con- sequently, axT> ! ah ! oh ! OH oh ! ah !
§ 6. Words are made up of syllables (cjors), and syllables of letters (6yKBfl).
§ 7. A letter is that which is produced by separate sounds of the voice.
§ 8. There are thirty-six letters in the Russian Alphabet.3
05s. — The Slavonic letter ir is pronounced in a twofold man- ner, (1 ) as u in the word Mvpo chrism or holy oil, and CVHOA& synod ; and (2) as e in the words Evanr&iitf Gospel, and HcavL Esau. The letter ir is only used in modern Russian in the word Mvpo, and its derivatives, such as Mvpo- noMaaame rite of anointing, MVponocHua bearer of the holy oil, etc.
§ 9. Russian letters are divided into vowels (iMacna/z 6yKB0), semi- vowels (no.iyr.iacHfl# 6^KB«), and consonants (conacim/J 6yKB0).
§10. The vowels are pronounced without the aid of other letters. They are as follows : — a, e, n, i, o, y, H, "fc, a, H), fl.
N.B. — The vowel e accented is pronounced in several words like io (HO) : Ex. e\iKa fir-tree, je'At ice, MCAT. honey, mead, noerb * he, she, or it sings. In such cases two dots are sometimes placed over the letter e, thus e.
§11. The semi-vowel H (or u short) is written and pronounced
after vowels : Ex. AHApett Andrew, lerKm light, noKowHbitt tranquil.
The semi-vowels t and b'are employed after consonants. TJ
gives them a hard sound : Ex. CTO.I5 table, 015^345 departure.
But L gives a soft sound to the consonant which precedes
it : Ex. CTO.I& so much, so many, atoHbiii business-like.
The letter v (a/Kima, name of this Slavonic letter), as has
been said in the observation at foot of § 8, is pronounced
in a twofold way, viz. either like the vowel u, or like the
1 First person, singular number, present participle, active, of the verb leiaifr, to read. Tram.
2 Present gerund of the verb 6l>raT6, to run. Trans.
3 See Table facing p. xi. Trans.
4 Third person, singular number, present tense, of the verb nte, to sing. Trans.
( 3 )
consonant <?. In the first case, therefore, it may be reckoned as a vowel, and in the second as a consonant.
§ ] 2. The consonants are uttered with the aid of vowels. The consonants are 6, B, r, A, >K, 3, K, i, M, n, n, p, c, T, <&, x, q, M, m, m, e.
§ 13. One vowel, or the coupling of one or more vowels with semi- vowels or consonants, forms a syllable : Ex. a, o, y, a, W35, OT&, ail, eii, npit-cip0-MT&, ow-4/ft.i&-HbiH, y-Kpa-we-m-e.
§14. Words are made up of one or more syllables, and are classified as mono-syllabic (oj(UOCJi6iKBoe),dis-s//lladic (^BycMOJKHoe), tri- syllabic (ipexaiojKHoe), and poly-syllabic (MHoroaio/KHoe) : Ex. noJK5 regiment, 3a-KOH5 law, H6-JO-B/&K5 man, eo-fiep-iiieH-CTBO perfection.
§ 15. Words may be either primary (KOpeHHoi) or derivative
§ 16. Primary words are such as are not derived from other words : Ex. Becai&£ joy, jKajti& to pity.
§ 17. Derivative words are formed from the primary: Ex. BecaiLHaKff merry fellow, Bece'jbiii merry, Bece^HTftca to make oneself merry, &c., derived from Becejbe ; 3KaiocT& pity, cow&ikme commiseration, HiajKm miserable, des^AOCtEbiu pitiless, cjKajHTftca to take pity on, jKcU& it is a pity, &c., derived from ffia.ii>T&.
§ 18. Compound (cjiowftoe) words are formed by the junction of two or more single words : Ex. MOpeiuaBaTe.i& navigator, good action, ffesjipuci^aciie impartiality, &c. Integral words can be formed in like manner, such as FeHep Major-General, KTO-HH6JA& someone, &c.
§ 19. All words in the Russian language are divided, according to their meaning, into umeparts of speech (qaci& pij<m.) These are : —
I. Noun Substantive (Ham
II. „ Adjective (HMa
III. „ Numeral (Haia
IV. Pronoun
V. Verb
VI. Adverb (Hap^iie).
VII. Preposition (IIpe4ji6r&). VIII. Conjunction (CoK)35).
IX. Interjection
B 2
( 4 )
§ 20. Words belonging to the first six parts of speech have variable terminations, whereas those belonging to the three last named do not alter in any way.
THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE (HMH CymecTBHiei&Hoe) •
§ 21 . A Noun Substantive is the name of any object : Ex. Eor& God, 40M5 house, 36M.ia earth, TepnijH&£ patience, qacT> hour, o'clock, &c.
§ 22. Objects (npe^Meis) are (1) animate (ojymeBje'flHbiH), i.e. those which have life and voluntary motion : Ex. HeJOBi>KT» man, He'iptf Peter, &c., &c.
Obs. — The names (HMH) by which we call people are personal (JHHHWH) objects : Ex. 6pai5 brother, cecipo. sister, AieK- caH£p5, Alexander, Map&/& Mary, no.iK6BHHK8 colonel, co.i- 4ai5 soldier, Macieps master, &c.
(2) Inanimate (Heo#yffleB.ieHHBiH), i.e. those which have not
life and voluntary motion. Ex. 4yo5 oak, flOM5 house, KOMHaia room, nepo feather.
Obs. — To the class of inanimate objects belong the sensitive (qyBCTBeHHbm) : Ex. 6.I6CK& splendour, r6pen& bitterness, 3anax5 smell.
(3) Intellectual (yMCTBeHHbm) or abstract (oTBjeneHHbm), which are presented to the understanding by such words as cnpoM- HOCTB modesty, npHjeffiaH^ application, BOoSpaaieHi^ imagi- nation, BpeMfl time, ro4T> year, &c.
Obs. — Bors God, BoroiieJOBiKjj godly man, anrej^ angel, ayxtf spirit, 4yina soul, and other similar nouns which denote immaterial beings, are called spiritual (yjyxoBHbw) objects.
§ 23. Nouns Substantive are divided into (1) appellative (napH- uaiejibHoe), or common (66mee), under which denomination come all objects which are common to a class. Ex. H&!OBi>K& man, Kopojfe king, ropOA» town, pa^ocib joy, &c.
(2) Proper (c66cTBeHH00), by which we distinguish one object from all others that may be like it. Ex. AjeKcaH^pS Alexander, MapL^ Mary, Pocci# Russia, Bojra Volga, &c.
Obs. — To the proper nouns belong not only all Christian names of people, but also their patronymics, and family
( 5 )
or surnames. Ex. HeaHOtftm son of John, Ueipoeua daughter of Peter, TypreH£tf5 Toorgeneff, HyiiiKiiiiB Poosh- kin, &c.
(3) Collective (Co6HpaTeJBH0<?), which by the use of one word
imply few or many objects representing the same sort or kind. Ex. ceMeHCTBO family, Hap6fl& people, BOHCKO army, .ito forest, &c.
Obs. — In order to note a quantity of animals, birds, or insects, the following collective nouns are used : cia^o herd or flock of cattle or sheep, xaSyHff drove or stud of horses, eras flight or covey of birds, or pack of dogs, pott swarm of bees, &c.
(4) Material (BemeciBeHHoe), which indicate the substance
of the object, be the quantity large or small. Ex. 36.1010 gold, Mi>fl& copper, jepefio wood, MyKo. flour, Macjo oil, butter, &c.
§ 24. It is a peculiarity of the Russian language that nouns substantive may be (1) augmentative (yBejnHHTCJbHO^), or those which show the unusually large size of an object. Ex. coJAaTHiiji big soldier, pymma large hand, ciojam^ huge table, &c.
(2) Diminutive (vMeHLUiHTejLHOtf), or those which designate the smallness of the object. Ex. coJAaiHK5 small soldier, pyiKfl small hand, CTOJHKT> little table, &c. To the class of diminutive nouns belong (a) the compli- mentary (npHBtTCTBCHHOtf) or caressing (.lacKaieJiBHOtf), which are used in the Russian language when addressing or naming favourite objects, or in order to give expression to a sense of love for such. Ex. 6paieq5 dear brother, cecTpwaa dear sister, Bae^, Banwma, BanHHKa dear John, Kai/?, Kaiibiiirt, KaieeLKa dear Kate, joma^yuiKa dear horse, KOpoBVinKfl dear cow, pyieHBKfl dear little hand, &c. (b) Derogatory (yHflqnJKiiTeJtHOtf), or those which give expres- sion to a want of regard for an object, or a sense of its insignificance, or a contempt for it. Ex. KHHTKOHK^ miser- able book, 40MHIDK0 wretched house, JOina^eHK^ sorry horse, &c.
§ 25. In the case of nouns substantive the gender pO£5, numbei MIHXIO, and case nafleattf, should be observed
( 6 )
§ 26. Nouns substantive in the Russian language have three genders (po^s), viz. masculine (MyjKecKw), feminine (iKeHCKm), and neuter (cpeAHm).
The gender of nouns substantive is ascertained either by their meaning or by their termination. As touching the former, all objects of the male sex (no matter what may be their termination) are of the masculine gender. Ex. Oiyra servant, nknH uncle, noAMaciepbtf foreman, MteLio money-changer, &c. ; and objects of the female sex (no matter what may be their termination) belong to the feminine gender. Ex. ciyacaHKa servant-maid, RH.RJI nurse, flOH& daughter, &c.
The same rule applies to animate objects which distinguish male (caneus) and female (caMKa) in animals. Ex. .ieB5 lion, jBBHua lioness, Gapaas ram, OEnd ewe or sheep, ntiyxtf cock, Kypnufl hen, &c.
Nouns ending in H and T> belong to the masculine gender. Ex. Mypasew ant, ope\i5 eagle, DOKOW rest, CTOI& table, &c.
Nouns ending in a and a belong to the feminine gender. Ex. ninara sword, jiiiU lily, 3a66ra care, fly ma soul, &c.
Nouns ending in o, e, and MH belong to the neuter gender. Ex. OKHO window, Mope sea, BpeM/z time, &c.
To the neuter gender belongs also n\\iii child.
Of nouns substantive, which terminate in t, some belong to the masculine gender. Ex. ^en& day, KOpaGjft ship; whilst others belong to the feminine gender, as T^H& shadow, plane, surface, &c.
§ 27. Besides the above, there are, in the Russian language, other nouns substantive ending in a and A, which are of the common (66miw) gender. In other words, such nouns as have the same termination for both masculine and feminine genders. Ex. on pom orphan, 6po#ara vagabond, iuaKCfl whiner, po#H/z kindred, &c.
§ 28. Augmentative and diminutive nouns, no matter what may be their terminations, belong to the gender of those nouns from which they are derived.
§ 29. Foreign nouns employed in the Russian language which end in u and y, when they denote animate objects, are of the masculine gender, and when they refer to inanimate or abstract
( 7 )
objects are of the neuter gender. Ex. KOJa6pw humming-bird, KaiiaAJr cockatoo, which are of the masculine gender: napH=3aiuafl5 bet, wager, which is of the neuter gender.
§ 30. Personal nouns have two genders, viz. masculine and feminine. Ex. HMneparops Emperor, HMnepaipHiw Empress, Fefle- pa.15 General, Feflepajbiiia General's wife, MOHaxtf monk, MonaxiuiA nun, cod^S male neighbour, cock^a female neighbour, &c. 4HPeR- ipHCfl directress, HHcneKipHO? inspectress, SKOHOMK^ housekeeper, refer solely to the persons of the female sex who perform the duties indicated by their respective designations ; whereas, on the other hand, AHpeKTOpin0, MHcneKTOpnm, SKOHOMina are the Russian de- signations for the wives of a director, inspector, and house steward respectively.
With regard to the names of peoples; the feminine is derived from the masculine thus : — from POCCWHHH& Russian (man), comes Pocci/iHKa Russian (woman) ; from AfliMHiaiiHHS Englishman, AHiMHHaHM Englishwoman ; from Hi>Meu& German (man), we get H^MIM German (woman), &c. Personal nouns which denote kindred or affinity have for each sex separate denominations : —
Oieiiff father, Mais mother.
CbiH5 son, 4oH& daughter.
Bpais brother, Cecipa sister.
uncle, Te'TKa aunt.
§ 31 . In the Russian language the denominations of the several degrees of relationship are extremely numerous. It may be well to observe the following :. —
Teci& father-in-law, wife's father. Te'm# mother-in-law, wife's mother.
brother-in-law, wife's brother. or CfiOHHeHHijfl sister-in-law, wife's sister. CBOJIK& brother-in-law, wife's sister's husband. CfieKOp?J father-in-law, husband's father. CBeKpoB& mother-in-law, husband's mother. 4efiep& or 4^Bep& brother-in-law, husband's brother. SoioBKft sister-in-law, husband's sister. 3ai& son-in-law or brother-in-law, daughter's husband or sister's husband.
( 8 )
HesiciKa daughter-in-law or sister-in-law, son's wife or brother's wife. or BOTHHM& stepfather. stepmother. stepson. stepdaughter.
§ 32. There are two numbers (HHCJO). The singular (e^6ecTBeH- Eoe), which speaks of one object : Ex. (5pai& brother, p^Ka river. The plural (MHOJKeciBeHHoe), which refers to two or more objects of the same sort : Ex. 6paTta brothers, pijKtt rivers, &c.
§ 33. Certain nouns substantive are used in the singular number only, whilst others, although referring to one object, have only a plural form.
Of the former class there are (l)the greater part of the proper (coftcTBeflHOtf) nouns: ^?.PnM5 Rome, Beaysiw Vesuvius, &c. (2) the greater number of the material (BemecTBGHHoe) nouns : Ex. 364010 gold, MOJOKO milk, &c. (3) the names of the virtues and the vices : Ex, Tepnims'tf patience, indolence, &c. (4) many of the abstract nouns : Ex. CHacT?> fortune, ciapocift old age, &c. (5) many of the names of plants, especially of the kitchen -garden : Ex. maBC4& sorrel, JiyK5 onion, &c.
Of the latter class some have meanings different to that of the singular form : Ex. JL&AU people, HOJKHHIIW pair of scissors, Bopora gate, &c. Others are the names of old towns and places : Ex. A.0HH&1 Athens, 0epMonft.i« Ther- mopylae, &c.
§ 34. Certain nouns have in the singular number one sig- nification, and in the plural another. Ex. Bic5 weight, Bicbt scales, Aeebra J copeck, fleHBrw money, Hacff hour, iac&! watch, clock, &c.
§ 35. Cases (naflejKB) are the terminations of nouns which show the various relations in which objects stand to each other.
% 36. In the Russian language there are seven cases. They answer to certain questions : —
( 9 )
(1) Nominative (nMeHUTeJbHbm), which answers to the ques-
\ / V / ' -I
tions — KTO? who ? HTO? what?1 Ex. KTO npHme.i'b? (past tense of verb npnATH), who came ? Ans. EpaT& brother. *JTO y Te6a BT> pyKaxi. ? What is there (or hast thou) in (thy) hands ? Ans. nuana a hat.
(2) Vocative (sBarejibHbm), which has its termination like the nominative, points to the designation of the object to which we refer. Ex. BpaTtf ! noAH 2 CK)Aa. Brother ! come here. 3AOpoB&-.iH Tbi, jK)6e3HbiH Apyn>? Art thou well, dear friend ?
(3) Genitive (pOAHTC-ibHbm), which answers to the questions —
Koro ? *ler6 ? ^ea ? *lba ? *Ibe ? Of whom ? Of which or of what ? Whose (masc. fern, neuter) ? J5£e. Koro SA^Cb Hi>T5 ? 3 is not here ? ^*. BpaTa, brother. — ^ero BA^Cb H^TS ? is not here? Ans. Hl^anbi, the hat.— ^ea STOTZJ AOM» ? house (is) this ? ^tw«. Moero npiaTej^, My friend's.
(4) Dative (AaTejbHbm), which answers to the questions — KOMV?
^eMy ? To whom ? To which ? or to what ? JJk. Koiviy
Tbi OTA3J5 4 KHHry? To ^ow didst thou give back the
book ? Ans. BpaTy, To the brother. — ^eiwy Tbi VAHB-
lambca ? 6 What dost thou admire ? ^w*. nuan/b the hat.
(5) Accusative (BHHHTCJbHbm), which answers to the questions —
Koro ? ^TO ? whom ? which ? what ? Ex. Koio Tbi ? 6 Whom dost thou see ? Ans. 6paT# brother. Tbi AepJKninb ? 7 #^^ dost thou hold ? ^ft$. iiLian?/ the hat.
(6) Instrumental (TBOpHTCJbHbm), which answers to the ques-
1 The questions, KTO ? Kord ? KOM^ ? KtMt ? 0 KOMX ? serve for the animate nouns ; whilst HTO ? Herd ? Hesiy ? HtMi ? 0 He'Mi ? are used in the cases of the inanimate and abstract nouns.
2 Second person, singular number, imperative mood, of the verb DO&TH. Trans. 8 With the impersonal verb HtT5 the genitive case is required. Tram.
4 Past tense of the verb OTfldTb. Trans.
* Present tense of the verb y^BRiaTtca, which governs the dative. Trans. 6 Present tense of the verb BH4tTb. Trans.
* Present tense of the verb jepJKaTB. Trans.
( 10
tions — Klurs ? ^1^5 ? by whom ? by wliat ? or by which ? Ex. Kt.M5 ibi AOBOJCWS ? : With whom art thou satisfied ? As. Eparo.M&, with the brother. — *Hi.M» TH ^OBoje«5 ? with w/^, or with which, art thou satisfied ? Ans. ffljfino70, with the hat.
(7) Prepositional (npe&iovKB&w), which answers to the ques- tions — o KOMI, ? o Mean, ? npn KOMT> ? npa HCMT, ? Ha KOMT, ? Ha MeMt ? BT> KOMT, ? BI> MCMT, ? about whom ? about which, or what ? near or at whom ? near or at which or what ? on whom ? on which or what ? in whom ? in which or what ? J5b. 0 KOMT> a roBopib ? 2 tffoi^ w/i<m do I speak ? A*. 0 Spark, about brother. — 0 MeMT> a roeopib ? about which or what do I speak ? A,s. 0 nijani, about the hat.
Obs. — The nominative and vocative cases, the terminations of which are not subject to change (further than is caused by number), are called the direct (npaMofi) cases ; whereas all the other cases, the terminations of which do alter (differing- the one from the other), are called the oblique (nocBeHiibw) cases. The prepositional case is always used with prepo- sitions (npej.i6rs). The following are the most frequently used prepositions: — o, or 061, or 060 (about), Ha (on or upon), npn (near, at, in the presence of), BT> or BO (in or at).
§ 37. The declension (cooHenitf) of nouns marks the changes of termination which they undergo according to number and case. In the Russian language there are three declensions.
To the first belong those nouns substantive which terminate
in &, u and &, being of the masculine gender. To the second those which terminate in a and H, of both the masculine and feminine genders, and those in 6 of the feminine gender only.
To the third those which terminate in o, e and MX, being of the neuter gender.
§ 38. Nouns substantive are declined according to the following tables : —
1 Abbreviated form of the adjective ^OBo^tHbiti. Trans.
2 Present tense of the verb roBOpHTb. Trans.
Singular Number.
|
Habeas. Cases. |
IST DECLENSION. MASC. TERMINATION. |
2ND DECLENSION. FEM. TERMINATION. |
3RD DECLENSION. NEUT. TERMINATION. |
||||||
|
liMCMI. H 3Bai. Nom. & Voc. |
i |
I |
b |
a |
A |
b |
0 |
e |
Mil |
|
PO£HT. Gen. |
a |
* |
H |
H |
» |
« |
a |
a |
(Mill |
|
Dat! |
y |
K) |
K) |
•B |
•6 |
B |
y |
K) |
(Mill |
|
BHH. Ace. |
(-b ^ |
I |
"} |
y |
K) |
b |
0 |
e |
Mil |
|
Tfiop. Instr. |
on |
en |
CM'L |
OH) |
CK) |
bK) |
on |
CM'L |
eneM-b |
|
Dpe/j. Prep. |
, |
, |
•B |
•B |
•B |
• |
•B |
* |
eini |
Plural Number.
|
rbien. H Ssax. Nom. & Voc. |
bl |
H |
B |
bl |
H |
• |
a |
H |
e.a |
|
Gen. |
m |
e», |
el |
I |
b |
el |
1 |
el |
enx |
|
Dat. |
-'Mil. |
HM'b |
AMI |
aM-b |
AMI |
AMI |
aM'L |
JIM'I, |
enanii |
|
BHH. Ace. |
("OBI |
6BI |
efl} B j |
(X lu |
b B |
B) |
a |
A |
cna |
|
TBOp. Instr. |
aMii |
JIMH |
JIMU |
aMii |
JIMU |
JIMU |
a»B |
JIM II |
eiiaMii |
|
Prep. |
ax^ |
flXl |
HX-b |
axx |
flXT> |
AXl |
axi |
,» |
en an. |
EXAMPLES OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.
Singular Number.
|
Animate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
Animate Object |
|
|
H. 3. |
CJOei, elephant. |
CTO.Il, table. |
nOKOH, rest, or room. |
flapb, Tsar. |
|
P. |
CJOIia, of an elephant. |
CTOJ^, of a table. |
noKoa, of rest, &c. |
qapa, of a Tsar. |
|
4- |
C-iOHy, to an elephant. |
CTOJy, to a table. |
HOKOIO, to rest, &c. |
ijapro, to a Tsar. |
|
B. |
(MO Ha, an elephant. |
CTOJIX, a table. |
noKofi, rest, &c. |
papa, a Tsar. |
|
T. |
C.10HOMI, by an elephant. |
CTOJOMl, by a table. |
noKoeMi, with rest, &c. |
nape'Mi, by a Tsar. |
|
n. |
0 CJOH*, about an elephant. |
Ha CTOJ*, on a table. |
Bl HOKO-B, at rest, &c. |
iipn uajrfi, in the presence o a Tsar. |
Plural Number.
|
Animate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
Animate Object. |
|
|
H. 3. |
C-IOHbl, |
Cmiti, |
noKon, |
ijapn, |
|
elephants. |
tables. |
rooms. |
Tsars. |
|
|
P. |
C.IOHOBT), |
CTOJOBl, |
noKoeB-b, |
n;ap£ft, |
|
of elephants. |
of tables. |
of rooms. |
of Tsars. |
|
|
4- |
CJIOHaMl, |
CTOJaMl, |
IIOKOflMT>, |
ijapairb, |
|
to elephants. |
to tables. |
to rooms. |
to Tsars. |
|
|
B. |
CJOHOBT), |
CTOJM, |
DOKO0, |
ijap6E, |
|
elephants. |
tables. |
rooms. |
Tsars. |
|
|
T. |
C.TOnflMH, |
CTOJaMH, |
nOKOSMH, |
qapaMH, |
|
by elephants. |
by tables. |
with rooms. |
by Tsars. |
|
|
n. |
0 C.IOHaXT), |
na cto.iaxT), |
BT> nOK03XT>, |
np0 ijapaxi), |
|
about elephants. |
on tables. |
in rooms. |
in the presence of |
|
|
Tsars. |
Singular Number.
|
Animate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
|
|
H. 3. |
•ibcien.'b, flatterer. |
crop. |
trophy. |
FB03AB, nail. |
|
P. |
jibcteija, of a flatterer. |
ypOJKaa, of a crop. |
of a trophy. |
of a nail. |
|
4- |
jbcieijy', to a flatterer. |
ypomaro, to a crop. |
Tpo*e"io, to a trophy. |
to a nail. |
|
B. |
jbcxeita, a flatterer. |
ypoffiaii, a crop. |
Tpo*£ii, a trophy. |
a nail. |
|
T. n. |
X by a flatterer. / about a flatterer. |
ypoataeitfi, by a crop. about a crop. |
with a trophy, about a trophy. |
by a nail. / about a nail. |
Plural Number.
|
i |
||||
|
H. 3. |
.IbCTCIJb'l, |
ypoataH, |
Tpo*e"H, |
FBOSAH, |
|
flatterers. |
crops. |
trophies. |
nails. |
|
|
P. |
JbCienoBi |
ypOHt&JB'b. |
s TpOvCcB D« |
rB03#£0» |
|
of flatterers. |
of crops. |
of trophies. |
of nails. |
|
|
4- |
jbCieija'M'b, |
ypojKaflM-b, |
TpooeaMt, |
FBOS^aMX, |
|
to flatterers. |
to crops. |
to trophies. |
to nails. |
|
|
B. |
JbCTeiJOBl, |
ypoatan, |
TPO*^H, |
TBOSAH, |
|
flatterers. |
crops. |
trophies. |
nails. |
|
|
. |
• |
|||
|
T. |
.IbCTeiJHMH. |
ypoataaMH, |
TpO*cHMH, |
TBOS^aMHj |
|
by flatterers. |
by crops. |
with trophies. |
by nails. |
|
|
n. |
o .ibCTerjaxb, |
00i> y pO/ttai/iX D» |
o ipose'ax'b, |
i |
|
about flatterers. |
about crops. |
about trophies. |
about nails. |
|
|
i |
EXAMPLES OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.
Singular Number.
|
Animate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
|
|
H. 3. |
CTapocia, |
3B-B3AS, |
ny*Jfl, |
itfnb, |
|
headman. |
star. |
bullet. |
chain. |
|
|
P. |
ciapocTbi, |
3Bt3A&, |
ny\iH, |
q-BDH, |
|
of a headman. |
• of a star. |
of a bullet. |
of a chain. |
|
|
• |
• |
t |
||
|
4- |
CTapocrfc, |
3B'E34*, |
nyJ"B, |
irftn, |
|
to a headman. |
to a star. |
to a bullet. |
to a chain. |
|
|
B. |
ciapocty, |
BBtSAy, |
nyjro, |
iVfcnb, |
|
a headman. |
a star. |
a bullet. |
a chain. |
|
|
t |
||||
|
T. |
CTapOCTOK), |
38*34610, |
nyjero, |
ntaftDj |
|
by a headman. |
by a star. |
by a bullet. |
with a chain. |
|
|
n. |
0 ciapOCTt, |
/ |
0 ny-i*, |
ea utiiii, |
|
about a headman. |
in a star. |
about a bullet- |
on a chain. |
Plural Number.
|
I |
||||
|
H. 3. |
CTapOCTU, |
3B-B34H, |
nyJB, |
ilinH, |
|
headmen. |
stars. |
bullets. |
chains. |
|
|
P. |
CTapOCTl, |
1 |
nyjb, |
il'Tiiieii, |
|
of headmen. |
of stars. |
of bullets. |
of chains. |
|
|
• |
. |
|||
|
4- |
CTapoctairb, |
3B*3AaMl>, |
uyjaMi, |
uftnuWLf |
|
to headmen. |
to stars. |
to bullets. |
to chains. |
|
|
• |
r |
|||
|
B. |
CTapociy, |
3B*B3 AM, |
nyje, |
ITBIIH, |
|
headmen. |
stars. |
bullets. |
chains. |
|
|
T. |
CTapociaMH, |
/ |
ny-iHMH, |
Hl;naMH, |
|
by headmen. |
by stars. |
by bullets. |
with chains. |
|
|
n. |
o CTapocxaxi, |
r |
o ny^axi, |
BI ^•B^flx^, |
|
about headmen. |
in stars. |
about bullets. |
in chains. |
Singular Number.
|
Animate Object. |
Animate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
|
|
H. 3. |
capoia, |
A«4H, |
•exitt] |
KHCTb, |
|
orphan. |
uncle. |
week. |
bunch, or wrist. |
|
|
P. |
CBPOTU, |
4«4H, |
HGAi-IH, |
KUCTH, |
|
of an orphan. |
of an uncle. |
of a week. |
of a bunch, &c. |
|
|
4- |
CHPOTB, |
AHA*, |
Begirt, |
KHCTH, |
|
to an orphan. |
to an uncle. |
to a week. |
to a bunch, &c. |
|
|
B. |
cepoiy, |
4H4H), |
eeAtJH), |
KHCTb, |
|
an orphan. |
an uncle. |
a week. |
a bunch, &c. |
|
|
T. |
CHPOTOK), |
ABACK). |
eeAtJero, |
KHCTbH), |
|
by an orphan. |
by an uncle. |
by a week. |
with a bunch, &c. |
|
|
n. |
0 CHPOTB, |
npa AH4*, |
Bl HeA*JfB, |
Bl KIICTH, |
|
about an orphan. |
in the presence of |
in a week. |
in a bunch, &c. |
|
|
an uncle. |
Plural Number.
|
Animate Object. |
Animate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
|
|
H. 3. |
cnpoTW, |
i |
ee/jlUH, |
KMCTH, |
|
orphans. |
uncles. |
weeks. |
bunches, &c. |
|
|
P. |
CHPOTT., |
AflAeft, |
nefliib, |
KHCTefi, |
|
of orphans. |
of uncles. |
of weeks. |
of bunches, &c. |
|
|
4- |
CHpoiaMt, |
i |
HeAlUflMt, |
KBCTaMl, |
|
to orphans. |
to uncles. |
to weeks. |
to bunches, &c. |
|
|
B. |
ceporB, |
A«Aeft, |
He^iiH, |
KHCTB, |
|
orphans. |
uncles. |
weeks. |
bunches, &c. |
|
|
T. |
cnpdiaMO, |
AHAHMH, |
HeAilflMH, |
KHCTHMH, |
|
by orphans. |
by uncles. |
by weeks. |
with bunches, &c. |
|
|
n. |
o CHpdtaxi, |
npn 4;ijnxT>, |
B D H (. fj L.TfIX D* |
B1 KHCTHXt, |
|
about orphans. |
in the presence of |
in weeks. |
in bunches, &c. |
|
|
uncles. |
EXAMPLES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
Singular Number.
|
Inanimate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
Inanimate Object. |
|
|
H. 3. |
A&IO, |
dCmecrso, |
n6ie, |
HMfl, |
|
affair. |
society. |
field. |
name. |
|
|
P. |
Aiia, |
<56meciBa, |
s |
iiMenn, |
|
of an affair. |
of society. |
of a field. |
of a name. |
|
|
4- |
r |
dOineciBy, |
no-no, |
inKMlII, |
|
to an affair. |
to society. |
to a field. |
to a name. |
|
|
B. |
A-B.IO, |
dfiojecTBO, |
ndjie, |
HMfl, |
|
an affair. |
society. |
a field. |
a name. |
|
|
T. |
i |
66meCTBOMT>, |
ndjeMi., |
imeHesn,, |
|
with an affair. |
by society. |
with a field. |
with a name. |
|
|
n. |
/ |
BT> 66meCTB'fej |
Ha no.rii. |
o6i> I'IMCHH, |
|
about an affair. |
in society. |
in a field. |
about a name. |
Plural Number.
|
n. 3. |
A^a, |
66mecTBa, |
nojfl, |
HMCna, |
|
affairs. |
societies. |
fields. |
names. |
|
|
p. |
A-B.II>, |
dGmecTBT., |
no-ieii, |
HMeni, |
|
of affairs. |
of societies. |
of fields. |
of names. |
|
|
4- |
A-BJaMi, |
dfimecTBaan., |
t |
HM01!UMT>, |
|
to affairs. |
to societies. |
to fields. |
to names. |
|
|
B. |
AtJa, |
odmeciBa, |
no.™, |
HMena, |
|
affairs. |
societies. |
fields. |
names. |
|
|
T. |
A*JaMH, |
66mecTsaMH, |
HO^flMH, |
IIMCIlaMH, |
|
by affairs. |
by societies. |
with fields. |
with names. |
|
|
n. |
o At-iiirfc, |
BT> d(5mecTBaxx, |
BT> no.iaxi, |
061 HMeHaxi, |
|
about affairs. |
in societies. |
in fields. |
about names. |
Singular Number.
Plural Number.
|
Anira. or Inanim. |
Inanimate Object. |
Aniin. or Inanim. |
Inanimate Object. |
|
|
H. 3. |
x face, or person. |
aepitajo, mirror. |
faces, or persons. |
86pK84&) mirrors. |
|
P. |
.iiiqa, of a face, &c. |
sepKa.ia, of a mirror. |
of faces, &c. |
ot mirrors. |
|
4- |
to a face, &c. |
to a mirror. |
/ to faces, &c. |
to mirrors. |
|
B. |
jequ, a face, &c. |
3t'{)i;;uo, a mii'ror. |
juqa, faces, &c. |
3epKa.ia, mirrors. |
|
T. |
x by a face, &c. |
3l'l)K,'LK)M'L, with a mirror. |
/ by faces, 'fee. |
with mirrors. |
|
n. |
na Jim (;, on a face, &c. |
BT> 3epKa.it, in a mirror. |
about faces, &c. |
in mirrors. |
§ 39. Rules for the Declensions.
(1) Nouns substantive, taken from foreign languages, and which end in "6, u and &> are declined according to the first declension : Ex. CK)JKei5 subject, aHTHKBapiw antiquary, B6KC6J& bill of exchange. Those which end in a and H, and also in &, and which are of the feminine gender, are declined according to the second declension : Ex. 4>pa30 phrase, apivfi/j army, MOAG.I& model. Nouns taken from foreign languages, and which terminate in 0, e} u, y, are not declined at all : Ex. ^eno depot, JKC-ie jelly, KOJMOpH humming- bird, KaKa^y cockatoo, &c.
(2) The vowel bi is never found after the letters r, at, K, x, H, m, m : it is changed in such a case into u. For this reason the nominative case of the plural number of nouns which end in 5 are not quite according to the ordinary rule. Ex. Bpam enemies (from spars), uo'fKu knives (from HOIKD), HY-IKM. stockings (from HJMOKB), &y\u spirits (from jyx5), acmt nights (from HOH&), nituaiim tents (from raajaiii5), njamu cloaks (from ruams), &c., instead of Bparbi, no/Kbi, qyjKb'l, &c. In like manner the genitive case of the singular number and the nominative case of the plural' number of nouns ending in a are — Kimrn books (from KUHIY&), Be.ibMO5KW grandees (from BCJbMO/Ka), pyKw hands (from pvKti), and not Kuarbi, Be^BMOJKb?, pyKb'i, &c.
(3) After the same letters, too (r, at, K, x, M, m, m, and K also), a and K) never follow. In place of a, a must be written, and in place of K), y. Ex. In the genitive case singular we find cep^ua, and not (from cepjae, heart). So, too, in the dative case of the same
( 16 )
word we have cepAuy, and not cepAiw. Similarly the dative case of jKHJnmtf (dwelling-) is jKH.iHmy, and not jKBMHmw.
(4) Nouns substantive which end in i^e are declined after the manner of those which end in 0, except that the instrumental case of the singular number, instead of OMI, has CMI. Ex. cep^aeMt (from cepaue heart), noJOieHneMt (from noJOieHue towel), and the like. Those nouns which terminate in no accented have in the instrumental case of the singular number OMti : Ex. anijoMt (from HHUO egg), jauoMt (from AEU,O face, or person).
(5) All words containing the letters JK, n, H, m, m, which carry in the instrumental case of the singular number the accent (y^ape- HJe) on the last syllable have OMt, and not CMT>, for the termination of that case. Ex. HOJKOM-L (from HOJKT, knife), OTUOMT> (from OTeirL father), &c. Similar words which do not carry the accent on the last syllable have CMT., and not GMT., for the termination of that case : Ex. MyraeMt (from MVJKT> man, husband), MtcaueMt (from Mi>- cam> month), &c.
(6) In the declensions the letter /b never follows the letter *. Con- sequently, in the dative and prepositional cases of the singular number of nouns which end in in it is necessary to write #, and not /& : Ex. <DpaHaiH, to France (from <I>paHEUfl) ; 0-iihiH, about a lily (from jiuifl). The same rule is preserved in the prepositional case, singular number, of nouns which end in iu and ie. Thus Ilpa AHToniH, In the time of Anthony (from AHTOHIW) ; BT> coHHHeHia, in the com- position (from COH a Henie); &c.
(7) Nouns feminine which terminate in 6 also have in the dative and prepositional cases of the singular number u, and not /& : Ex. BT, Cii()Hpn, in Siberia (from CH6ap&), &c.
(8) In nouns masculine which terminate in &, the genitive case of the singular number has a : Ex. tfRb day, AH/Z ; 3Bep& wild beast, 3fiip^. In nouns of a like termination, but of the feminine gender, the termination of the same case of the same number has u : Ex. rfeH& shadow, T^HW ; ABep& door, pepM. To the first part of this rule the following word is the sole exception : nyi& (road), which although of the masculine gender, has for the termination of its genitive case singular w, — thus, uviu. Moreover, this word departs generally from the common rules laid down for the declen- sions. (Vide ^41.)
(9) A few nouns of the masculine gender ending in & take, in the
( 17 )
nominative case of the plural number, the termination of the genitive case of the singular number — with this difference, that the accent is shifted to the last syllable : Ex. BeKceJ& bill of exchange, plur. BCKce.1/? ; nncap& writer, plur. nacap/z, &c,
(10) In nouns substantive which terminate in ie, the nominative case of the plural number has a, and not u : Ex. JKejaHifl wishes, (from weA&m'e), not HtejaHm, &c. The genitive case of the plural number of these nouns ends in iu, and not in eei> : Ex. JKeiam'w, and nut jKCJametfff, &c.
(11) Nouns substantive which terminate in in also have in the genitive case of the plural number iu : Ex. Jimm lily, Ji&jiiu, &c.
(12) Nouns substantive which terminate in &/z have in the genitive case of the plural number eu, for which reason the letter & is dropped in the oblique cases : Ex. cy/j&/? judge, cy&eu, &c.
(13) Nouns substantive which end in en and /&/? change in the genitive case of the plural number the final letter n into u : Ex. WBeu seamstress, IIIBCM ; 3M/&# snake, 3Ml>w, &c.
(14) Nouns which end in &, and in which the letters OK, u, w, ui, are found, also have in the genitive case of the plural number eu : Ex. HO?Kew, (from HOJKS) ; M6H/M, (from MCI&) ; majiaffleM, (from majanis) ; n.iarne« (from iLiams), &c.
(15) Nouns which end in w^e have in the genitive case of the plural number 5 for their final termination : Ex. yHH.iHW{e school, YHHJinm8, &c.
(16) Nouns which terminate in KO have in the nominative case of the plural number u instead of a for their final letter : Ex. IWJIOKO apple, plur. /I&IOKU ; but BOHCKO army, troops, and 66.iaK0 cloud, are exceptions to this rule, as we find BOHCKO- armies, o6.iaKa clouds.
(17) Many material nouns, of the masculine gender, which ter- minate in 5, #, and 6, when placed after words denoting weight or measure, . take in the genitive case of the singular number the termination of the dative case of the same number, i.e. take the final letters TO and y, instead of the letters peculiar to their proper terminations, viz. a and a. Ex. ciaKans Maw (not Ma^). from Haw, cup of tea; apmnntf auacy (not aT.iaca), from auacs, arsheen, or Russian ell, of satin, &c. When, however, the same nouns stand after words which do not express measure or weight, then the terminations of their genitive case (singular) are according to the
c
( 18 )
ordinary rule, i.e. in a and n, and not in y and jo : Ex. BKVC& flavour of tea ; ni}KHOCT& auaca, softness of satin, &c.
(18) The accusative case, singular number, of nouns of the mas- culine gender which terminate in K, u, &, is, in the declension of the inanimate and abstract nouns, like the nominative ; and, in that of the animate nouns, like the genitive. Ex. a BHJKy1 (qio?) cmis, CTOJM ; pynew, pyHB^ ; K0pa6j&, K0pa6.m — I see (what /) table, tables; brook, brooks ; ship, ships, fl BHIK^ (KOFO?) 6pai#, 6par&<?05 ; MypaB&/£, MypaBe'0& ; 3Bf>p/z, 3Bepe# — I see (whom or what ?} brother, brothers ; ant, ants ; wild beast, wild beasts. The accusative case, singular number, of nouns of the masculine and feminine genders, which terminate in a, is in y : Ex. cjyra, man-servant, cjyn/ ; KHHIYZ book, KHHry. Similarly the accusative case, singular number, of nouns of the masculine and feminine genders, which terminate in /z, is in w. Ex. cyflijf judge, cyAb/o ; nyj/z bullet, np/o. The accusa- tive case, singular number, of nouns of the feminine gender, which terminate in &, is always like the nominative. The same remark applies too to all nouns of the neuter gender, without any distinction. The accusative case, plural number, of nouns of any gender is, in the declension of the inanimate nouns, like the nominative, and in the declension of the animate nouns, like the genitive.
Obs. — Collective nouns, even though they may denote a collection of animate objects of either the masculine or neuter genders, are declined in the accusative case like the inanimate nouns : Ex. OHT. paaStus2 /^npia'reJLCKiM He defeated the enemy's regiment ; J3acTyx5 eraflo, The shepherd drove in the flock, &c.
(19) The Vocative is, as a general rule, like the nominative; yet in certain nouns it has a peculiar termination of its own, borrowed from the Church Slavonic tongue: Ex. Eor& God, voc. EoJKe; Oieus Father, voc. OTH£, &c.
(20) Nouns which terminate in MR change n in all the oblique cases of both numbers into e : Ex. BpeJW/& time, BpeMe/w ;
&c. One word alone with this primary termination of
1 Present tense of the verb BHA-feib. Trans.
2 Past tense of the verb paaSnrb. Trans.
3 Past tense of the verb npHFH&Tf>. Tram.
( 19 )
retains in the genitive case, plural number, the letter a : this word is C&MH seed, d>M/?«5 of seeds.
(21) The words He6o heaven, and 4^40 miracle, in the cases of the plural number have nom. He6eca, ny^eca- ; gen. He6ecff, nyflecff, and so on. But when by the use of the word vfao is understood
monster, qy^o forms its plural thus, Hy/jw, Hy^tf, ny- , &c.
(22) The following nouns and a few others form their genitive case plural like their nominative case singular ; in other words, there is no change in form between the two cases : Ex. qe.iOBi>K&, man (or of men) ; coj/jarff, soldier (or of soldiers)'; /jparyHS, dragoon (or of dragoons) ; rycaps, hussar (or of hussars) ; y.iaH5, Uhlan (or of Uhlans) ; Ka^eTg, cadet (or of cadets) ; TypoKtf, Turk (or of Turks) ; rpeHa£ep&, grenadier (or of grenadiers) ; peKpyitf, recruit (or of recruits) ; apniHH5, arsheen (or of arsheens) ; ny^5, pood (or of poods) ; HyjoKtf, stocking (or of stockings) ; canorff, boot (or of boots), and others. Hence it is not correct to speak of coj/taioes, rycapo05, apniHHoes, nyAo'05, ny.iKo<?&, canoro0&, &c. The word cajKeub (a sajen, or Rusian fathom) in the genitive case, plural number, has ca*KeH5, and not caJKeii& or caateH<?#.
(23) Certain nouns,, which terminate in 5 and &, take in the pre- positional case of the singular number y or TO, instead of /&. In all such cases the accent falls on the final syllable : Ex. na 6oi»/ on the side or flank, from 6oK&; BI» j&cy in the forest, from .ite; BT> paw in Paradise, from paw ; &c.
§ 40. The following are some examples of nouns substantive which depart from the ordinary rules of declension : —
(1) Nouns which terminate in anum and mum have in the plural number special terminations.
Plural Number.
(Animate Objects.)
N. & V. H. 3. AnrjHiaHe, Englishmen.
G. P. AHiMBiaBT., of Englishmen.
D. 4. AeiMeiaHaMT,, to Englishmen.
A. B. AHrJHHaei, Englishmen.
I. T. AnriHiaHaMH, by Englishmen.
P. n. 06i AHrinidHaxT>, about Englishmen.
(Animate Objects.)
peasants. KpecTbani, of peasants. KpecTbawaMt, to peasants. KpecTbaHT), peasants. KpecibflHaMH, by peasants. 0 KpecTbaeaxi, about peasants.
N.B. — The singular number of nouns substantive terminating in dnuns and ftnum is declined according to the examples given of the first declension (vide paragraph 38).
( 20 )
(2) Nouns Substantive terminating in emiw are declined in loth numbers according to the following examples :
Singular Number.
(Animate Objects.)
N. & V. H. 3. TejenoR^, calf. • G. P. Te^eHKa, of a calf. D. 4- Te^eHKy, to a calf.
A. B. TejeHKa, a calf.
I. T. TejeHKOMi,, by a calf.
P. n. 0 Te-ieHK-B, about a calf.
(Animate Objects.) Bo-neHOKT., wolf's cub. Bo-iie'HKa, of a wolf's cub. Bo-iie'BKy, to a wolf's cub. BoJieeKa, a wolf's cub. BOJICHKOMI, by a wolf's cub. 0 BojieHKt, about a wolf's cub.
Plural
N. & V. H. 3. le-iaxa, calves.
G. P. Tejarb, of calves.
D. 4- TeJHTaMT), to calves.
A. B. Te.iflTT>, calves.
I. T. Te.ifliaMH, by calves.
P. n. 0 Tejfliaxi, about calves.
Bojiaia, wolf's cubs. Bo-naT"b, of wolf's cubs. Bo-naxaMi, to wolf's cubs, Bojqarb, wolf's cubs. B(MiaTaMn, by wolfs cubs. 0 Bojiaraxi), about Coif's cubs.
N.B. — According to the above two examples on eHOKG are declined pefieiiOKi child, infant ; atepefie'HOKi, foal ; arHenoKX, lamb ; KOieeoKi, kitten ; nopoce'BOK^, suck- ing-pig ; qbiiue'HOK'b, chicken; MeAB*neHOKT>, bear's cub. But .ibBeeoKt, lion's whelp, and Mbime'noKT), little mouse, respectively make their nominative case plural in eeKH ; thus, JLB^HKH and Mbim^HKH, and not -ibBaxa and Mbiuiaia.
§ 41. The following nouns substantive depart altogether from the ordinary rules of declension : —
Singular Number.
|
Animate Objects- |
Inanimate Objects. |
||
|
Hi. 3. AHTH, N.&V. child. |
MaTi>, mother. |
IJepKOBb, church. |
Hyxb, road. |
|
P. 4HTflTH, G. of child. |
Maiepn, of a mother. |
IJ^PKBH, of a church. |
HyxH of a road. |
|
4. 40T«TH5 D. to a child. |
Maiepa, to a mother. |
LJepKBH, to a church, |
ny™, to a road. |
|
B. 4HTH, A. a child. |
Maib, a mother. |
IJepKOBb, a church. |
Dyib, a road. |
|
T. 4HTHT6K), I. by child. 11. 0 4HTHT0, P. about a child. |
Ma/repbK), by a mother. 0 Marepn, about a mother. |
IJepKOBbK), by a church. Bi I^^PKBH, in a church. |
nyiejTb, by a road. Ha nyni, on a road. |
( 21 ) Plural Number.
|
H. 3. Aim, N.&V. children. |
MiVirjm, mothers. |
IJCPKBII, churches. |
Ilyiii, roads. |
|
P. A*T£B> G. of children. |
Maiep£fi, of mothers. |
HopKBcfi, of churches. |
nyie'B, of roads. |
|
4. 4*THMl, D. to children. |
MaiepaMi, to mothers. |
IJepKBaMl, to churches. |
HyxaMTi, to roads. |
|
B. AtT^fi, A. children. |
Marepefi, mothers. |
IJepKBHj churches. |
nyTH, roads. |
|
T. AtTbMH, I. by children. |
MaiepaMH, by mothers. |
HCPKBUMH, by churches. |
HyiaMB, with roads. |
|
H. 0 A*Tarb, P. about children. |
0 Maxepaxi), about mothers. |
B-b IJepKBaxx, in churches. |
0 nytaxT), about roads.
|
Obs. — The word AOH& (daughter) is declined like Mai&.
rocno4b, Lord, rdcno^a, of the Lord. r6cno4y, to the Lord, rdcno/ia, the Lord. FOCDO^H ! O Lord I r6cno40MX, by the Lord. 0 rdcnoAt, about the Lord.
N. H. XpecToci, Christ.
G. P. XpacTa, of Christ.
D. A- XpHCiy, to Christ.
A. B. Xpecia, Christ.
V. 3. XPHCT£ ! O Christ !
I. T. XpiicidMi, by Christ.
P. 0. 0 XpHCTt, about Christ.
§ 42. The following words have special inflections both in the genitive case singular, in the other oblique cases of that number, and in all the cases of the plural number : —
(1) By changing the intermediate letter e of the nominative case singular into 6 : —
Ex. JeBT>, lion, JbBa. Bopo6beii, sparrow, Bopotfba.
Je'4T>, ice, jbja. MypaBeii, ant, MypaBba.
Jem, flax, Jbea. Co.ioneii, nightingale, cojOBba.
Pyie"ft, brook, pyiba. JKiue'ij'b, tenant, HtEMbqa.
yjett, beehive, yjba. A*-^1^ statesman, 4i>.ibqa, &c.
(2) By changing the intermediate letter e of the nominative case singular into U : —
Ex. Hae'Mi, rent, nafiMa, I
Sae'Mi, loan, aaiiMa. I
(3) By changing the intermediate letter a of the nominative case singular into u : —
Ex. 3aaqx, hare, saiiqa, &c.
(4) By the elision of the letter e of the nominative case sin- gular : —
. isthmus, nepemefiKa. , gladiator, Oofiqa, &c.
Ex. Mo.ie'tfeQi, Te Deum, IlfiBe.n,, Paul, EaB.ia, Ope'JT., eagle, op.ia. KoTe4T>, kettle, Kowa. yse^x, note, y3.ia. nene.n>, ashes, ne"n.ia. Koae.n>, he-goat, K03.ia. Oce'JT., jackass, donkey, oc^a. KyneijT), merchant, Kynqa. OTeqi), father, oma. Kaaieeb, stone, uaMHa. Ileiib, stump, blockhead, nun. b, day, 4Hfl.
strap, pejma.
KoBe'pi, carpet, Kospa. B-brepi, wind, Btipa. Ulaiepi, tent, inaipa. Kocxepi, funeral pile, KOCipa. Xpefieii), spine, or ridge, xpe6ia Ernneii, Egypt, Erania. Ofleci, oats, OBca". Heel, dog, nca. A^HO^^, lamb, arnija.
, autocrat, , stalk,
KameJb, cough, CejeaeHb, drake, cdiesna.
(5) By the elision of the letter gular : —
COHI, sleep, cea. Oroeb, fire, ornA.
b, psalm, ncaviMii. corner, yr.ia. b, charcoal, ywa. yropb, pimple, yrpa. .Io6T>, forehead, Ji6&. noco.n>, ambassador, noc.ia. cover, Mexja.
crest, tuft of hair, xox.ia.
b, harpoon, Carpa. Byropi, hillock, 6yrpa.
Also many other words terminating in OKT>.
o of the nominative case sin-
Bnxop-b, tuft of hair, BHXpa,
CBe'KOpi), father-in-law, husband's father,
CBe'Kpa.
POTT., mouth, pia. 3aMom>, castle, r.aMKa. Horoib, nail, Hona. ^eroib, tar, pitch, ^ena. 3oBi, call, invitation, sna. IIIOBi>, seam, msa.
, share, otb, slice, , elbow, , stocking,
§ 43. The following words have special terminations for the nominative case of the plural number : —
OKO, eye, oin. yxo. ear, yme. pyKaBT>, sleeve, pyKasa. jieiiapb, physician, jeKapa. TJia.3T>, eye, wasa. 6oapHHT>, boyard, 6oape. 6ap0HT), gentleman, master, 6ape. rocno40Hi, lord, master, mister,
, master of the house, xoaaesa. raypaex, brother-in-law, wife's brother,
mypba. 6pan>, brother, dpatba.
, Godfather, a gossip, KjMOBba. , friend, KH33b, prince, c6jeq;e, sun, cojeqa. nepo, pen, nepba.
The following nouns have two terminations in the nominative case of the plural number: — #OM5 house, plur. 401^ and AOM&/; tutor, plur. yHHTej^' and yiHTe.iM ; npo<i>eccop5 professor,
( 23 )
plur. npo$eccop« and npo*eccop&e. The first of these terminations is in each instance the more frequently used in the language of conversation, and the latter in literature.
The following nouns (and others which by practice can easily be ascertained) have the termination of the nominative case of the plural number in bH : —
Ciy.n>, chair, ciy.ibfl ; npyrb, twig, rod, npyiba ; cyicb, branch, bough, cyiba.
§ 44. The following nouns have in the plural number double terminations, conveying in each instance different meanings : —
B fiKi>, B'EKH, eyelids. BiiKa, centuries.
x.i'fcfi'b, xjiflbi, loaves. xj*6d, grain of various kinds.
qstrb, i^Btibi, flowers. ijBln'a, colours.
3y6i, 3y6bi, teeth in the mouth. 3y6bfl, teeth of a comb or of a saw.
MlJXi, JTBXH, pair of bellows. Mtxa, furs of all kinds.
JIHCTI, JBCTM, leaves of a book, sheets of JHCTbfl, leaves of a tree.
paper.
MyHfb, MyjKH, men. MyjKba, husbands.
CbiBT>, cbiflOBba, sons. CUBM, sons of the fatherland only.
In the case of the following words : —
j£peBO, tree or wood, ^epeea, 4ep^Bba. KaMenb, stone, KUMIIH, Kaveiiba.
yrojb, charcoal, yrJH, yrojba.
Kopenb, root, Kopnn, KOpeHbfl.
hook, crook, KpiOKii,
The latter termination is used in a collective sense only. KOJ^HO (knee) has for its plural KO^iflW and KO.ii>Ha,, the last signifying race or generation.
§ 45. The following nouns have special terminations in the genitive case of the plural number : —
In etit, CBd^bCa, wedding, genitive plur. csa4e6i.
c^4b6a, fate, destiny, „ cy^fo.
TflHtfa, lawsuit, „ Taate6x.
In eis, Aeebra, copeck, „ 4^neri.
cepbra, earring, „ ceperx.
In ot», poara, rod, „ pdaon.
In e«5, me'ttKa, finger-board, „ nieeKi.
, cradle, „ JWjeKi.
nurse-maid, „ II/IHCKX.
spoon, „ Joa?eKi.
, small hand, handle, . „ pyieni.
, ring, link, „ KOJeqeKi.
, little window, „ OKOiueK'b. And so too have other nouns whose nominative case singular ends in IKO and mico.
( 24 )
In OK&,
In CM,
In aJit, In o.J5,
In e.\b}
In eMt,
In t'H5,
35 JJ
5) »
»
JJ »>
33
»
J3
peMece.il. i0ce.il.
CBH3Ka, bundle, ^». plur. CBBSOKI.
6a6Ka, grandmother, midwife. „ 6a6oK'b.
flOCKa, board, plank, „ AOCOKT>.
naiKa, stick,
HeiMa, broom,
C-B4JO, saddle
Bec.io, ear,
peMec^o, trade, craft,
H0CJO, number,
sepKa-io, mirror,
KyKja, doll, „ KyKOJi.
3-10, evil, „ 30JX.
(This word is used in the genitive case only of the plural number.)
CTCKJ6, glass, i.e. pane of gen. plur.
glass, and mirror glass, HiMa, needle,
Kpdfijfl, roof, Kanja, drop, ca6.ia, a sabre, II£T.IH, noose, 36M.ia, earth, niicbMo, letter, TiopbMa, prison, KOp'iMa, inn, TbMa, darkness,
(When TbMa means number. In the Ancient Slavonic reckoning this word signified ten thousand.)
|
» |
Hroj'i,. |
|
n |
KpOBP.lb. |
|
» |
nanejb. |
|
j) |
ca6e.ib. |
|
n |
nete\Jb. |
|
n |
SCM^Jb. |
|
| |
|
|
a |
HHCCM'b. |
|
» |
TIOPCMT). |
|
u |
KOp^^MT,. |
|
5> |
T6MT,. |
CpeBBo, beam, genitive plur.
cocna, fir-tree,
sepeo, grain, kernel,
6oflHa, slaughter-house,
HOJOTHO, linen,
KynajbHa, bathing-place,
cy4HO, vessel,
cnajbea, bedroom,
rpiiBna, ten copeck-piece,
Beiepea, vespers,
HapeBiia, title of the Russian
Imperial Princess, ofii^ea, Mass,
KHJI JKiiti, unmarried Princess, song,
i, custom-house, 6^CHa, tale, a story, BBinea, cherry-tree, 6ainea, tower,
» »> >» » » »
t) » »
>» » j> » »
» »>
6pe'Beei. coceei. sepeHi. OoeHi.
Kynajem.
cnajeHi. rpHBeei,.
I^ap^BeHi.
Koa/KeHX.
TaMoaieei.
Oacein,.
In ettb,
In OH5,
In ep?,
In #(5,
aepeBHH, village, hamlet,
mine,
, bake-house, H, quarry,
KyXHa, kitchen, OKBO, window, cyKHo, cloth, cecrpa, sister, Bejp6, pail, flApo, kernel, pe6p6, rib, no-ioi^Hije, towel, OBIJ£, sheep, ewe, KO-ibijo, ring, cep4ije, heart,
flight of steps,
KyXOHT..
OKOHT).
C^KOH-b.
cecrepi.
fljepi. pe6ep-b.
N.B. — The genitive case, plural, of Kymaete food, is KyraaHbGBi, and of noMtCTLe an estate noM'ficxiii.
§ 46. Nouns which are used in the plural number only are de clined, if of the masculine gender, according to the first declension ; if of the feminine gender, according to the second declension ; and if of the neuter gender, according to the third' declension. The gender of such nouns is ascertainable by their nominative and genitive cases : —
(1) Nouns which terminate in the nominative case in bi or u, and in the genitive in eeti or 06V, are of the masculine gender. Ex. mnnu&{, pair of tongs, nunmo0& ; THCKM, press, vice, THCKo'05; o66w, hangings, tapestry, oftoeez. The following is an exception : OKOB&I, chains, fetters, owed. This noun is of the feminine gender.
(2) Any other nouns which terminate in the nominative case in 61 or u, and in the genitive case in any sort of termination, are all of the feminine gender. Ex. canw, sledge, caee'w ; HOHtHEm&z, pair of scissors, HOJKHHUS; CJHBKM, cream, CARBOKV. The following is an exception : JIKVJM, people, JiWfreu. This noun is of the masculine gender.
(3) Nouns which terminate in the nominative case of the plural number in a are of the neuter gender. Ex. Bopom, gate;
wood ; ycrd, lips, mouth.
( 26 )
Concerning the Declension of Compound Nouns.
§ 47. In compound nouns the last word alone is declined. Ex. MOpexoAei|&, navigator, Mopexo^iw, MOpexoAuy, &c.
§ 48. Certain proper nouns have their own peculiar appositions : Ex. PnnapA& «Ib6UHoe Cepdye, Richard Lion-hearted. In all such instances the proper name only is declined, the noun or nouns in apposition remaining without change : Ex. PnHap^o^& Jbeuttoe Cepdiqe, by Richard Lion-hearted; 0 Pflqap^/6 JLteunoe Cepdi^e, about Richard Lion-hearted.
§ 49. The following compound nouns, which used to be declined separately, are now only inflected in the latter word: — E[ap&rpaA&, Tsar's City (name given by the Russians to Constantinople), I(ap&- , &c. ; HoBropOAff, New City (Novgorod;, HoBropOA#, &c.
§ 50. Nouns substantive, to which is prefixed the word nod or noJiy (contracted from noMeuua, half), have in all the oblique cases noJiy : 'Ex. noJ^eHft mid-day, gen. TLOAJ/AIMI, dat. no.i$AH70, ins. uojLyAReMti,prep. o
THE NOUN ADJECTIVE (HMH
§ 51. Nouns adjective are coupled with nouns substantive, in order to show the quality, attributes, and circumstances of the object. Nouns adjective agree with the substantives with which they are coupled in gender, number and case. Ex. xpa6pz>m BOHH&, brave warrior; xpa6p&i£ BOHHW, brave warriors ; xpa6pw#5 BOHH00&, of brave warriors ; GkjiaH jomaA&, white horse ; 3(MOTa/z mnam, golden sword ; BjifllHM 66meciBO, local society ; &c.
§ 52. Nouns adjective are comprised under the following heads : —
(1) Qualifying (KaqecTBennoe), which denote the quality or property of the several objects with which they are coupled. Ex. xpafipWM, brave ; BBicoKm, high ; Ma^ibiw, little, small ; &c.
(2) Possessive (npHTflffiaieJBHoe), which point out either to what the object belongs, such as PoccincKm Russian, and jBBHHbw per- taining to a lion, &c. ; or the substance of which the object is made, or to which it relates — for example, SOJOTOW golden, KaMene&m, of stone.
N.B. — The possessive adjectives are formed from nouns substantive.
( 27 )
(3) Circumstantial (oScTOSTewibCTBeHHOf), which point to the de- pendence of the object on the circumstances of time and place. Ex. ceroflHHiiiH&JM ypoK&, lesson of to-day ; Biepammw 06^45, dinner of yesterday ; a^tiim^ 66meciBO, local society ; &c.
§ 53. Nouns adjective have seven terminations, viz. for masculine gender, in biu} ou, iu ; for feminine gender, in a/i, HA ; for neuter gender, in oe, ee.
Ex. Masc. cjaBHbzw^ xy^ow ~\ CHHZW
Fern. cASLEHaal renowned, xyaa/zl bad, C&EHH blue.
Neut.
§ 54. All nouns adjective are subject to changes of termination in connection with the ordinary rules of declension. The qualifying adjectives are moreover influenced by changes of termination, con- nected with the use of shortened (yciqeHH&iw) forms, and with the degrees of comparison (cienea& cpaBHem;?).
§ 55. The shortening (ycfrieH^) amounts to a contraction of the full termination of the adjective in question. For example, instead of BeJLHK^ -an -oe, great, Be.iHK&-a-0 are the forms used.
§ 56. Qualifying adjectives have, therefore, for every case and number, two distinct terminations, viz. the full (uojiRoe) and the shortened
§ 57. The possessive and the circumstantial adjectives, on the other hand, have but the one full termination. Ex., HejiOB-feHecow' •an -oe human, 6yMaHtH&m -an, -oe made of paper, a^iimitt -nn -ee belonging to this place.
Obs. — Certain of the possessive adjectives, which are derived from personal nouns, may have two distinct terminations ; such as, —
The full, iiapCKifi -aa -oe
belonging to The shortened, ijapeBi esa £BO ) Tsar.
The full, OTEioBCKifi -aa -oe")
or > patrimonial.
The shortened, OTDOB^ -osa -OBO )
.afl -
-OBa -OBO
belonging to one's ancestors.
6paiHifl -aa-ee
6paTH0ei -HHea [• fraternal. -HHHQ
{ 28 ) 58. The shortened terminations of adjectives are as follows : —
(1) Of the qualifying adjectives —
Singular Number. Plural Number.
Masc. Fern. Neuter. All genders.
In &, b. a, R. o, e. w, u.
Ex. £o6p5 kind, £o6pa, Ao6po, #o6p&i;
CHH& blue, CHH/?, CHH/, CHHW.
(2) Of the possessive adjectives (derived from personal nouns) —
eet, 068, UHV ; eea, oea, una ; eeo, oeo, UHO ; eew, oeti, umi.
n;ap£ff5, mpeea, nap^o,
3HTHW/J5, 3flTHlf«^, 3STBMWO, 3flTHW«&?.
§ 59. The degrees of comparison of nouns adjective denote the various standards of the quality or property of an object. Ex. learned, yMH/60 or yMH/&wwm more learned, and caaibia most learned ; icpH&w black, HepHfl>£ or HepHT&mam blacker, and Bec&Ma HepH&m blackest of all, lit. very black ; c*ia6wM weak, CA&6ri>e or cja6/&Mmm weaker, and caMbm cja6bm weakest. The degrees of comparison are three : —
(1) Positive (no-iOJKHTeJLHflJz), which indicates the simple quality or property of an object, without making any comparison between it and any other object which may possess a like quality or pro- perty. Ex. BajKH&m HHH& important rank; BbicoKa/z ropa, high mountain ; &c.
(2) Comparative (cpaBHHTCJLH^^), which intimates, in a greater or less degree, the quality or property of one object as compared with one or more objects of the same sort. Ex. Bti nsopEUM BaJKH/MMty/o AO.IJKHOCT& Heate-in o«5, You have chosen a more important duty (or office) than he; 9io CVKHO nepH/&0 Heate^H TBO£, This cloth (is) blacker than thine; Epaitf MOW Bbiuie Te£&, My brother (is) taller than thee ; &c.
(3) Superlative (upeBOCXOAfl&fl), which points out the object possessed of the greatest degree of superiority or inferiority amongst a lot of objects of the same kind. Ex. On$ qHiaems
no.ie3Hyw KHnry, He is reading a most useful book ; BOTT> TiepHO(? CVKH0, Here is the blackest cloth (of all) ; &c.
( 29 )
§ 60. Nouns Adjective have in the comparative degree two distinct terminations, viz. a full termination in nuwiu -aa -ee and aiiwiu -an -ee, and a shortened termination in ne, Jbu. we, ue, we, wp. Ex. cuAiRibuwitt stronger, CIUI>H/&£, CHIBHT&M; nyGoHafttitf'tf deeper, TJijftwe ; Jieiue lighter ; ihwe quieter ; CAaiu/e sweeter.
O&s. — The terminations ibilmiU and ctuium may be used to express the superlative degree, but when so employed the words M3» ecTbxv, of all, must be understood. Ex. Pocci/? ecmb cKM>ETbuwee rocy^apciBO BT> CBBT/b, Russia is the most powerful sovereignty in the world.
§ 61. The superlative degree is formed —
(1) By placing before the full termination of either the positive or comparative degree the words — caMbiu most, npe very. Ex. CaMbm npiaiH&iw 4CH&, Most pleasant day ; CaMa/z BbicoHawaowz ropa, Highest mountain (of all) ; HpeK^cmbiu qBiTOKS, Prettiest flower.
(2) By placing before the full termination of the positive degree the words eecbMa extremely, ouem very. Ex. BecLMa noje3Hoe H3o6p4ieHie, Extremely useful invention; ()uem , Very pleasant meeting.
(3) By prefixing to certain adjectives of the comparative degree the particle nau, very best. Ex. ffauxyvniiu cnoc66&, very best method ; mufto&e uoAemoe 4'fejo, much the more useful work.
§ 62. For further intensifying the comparative degree the following word can be placed before the shortened termination of that degree — topdado much. Ex. Om topdsdo VMH/&<?, no iopdsdo , He (is) much more clever, but mucli worse than, &c.
For the purpose of detracting from the quality of an adjective the particle no (little) can be prefixed to the comparative degree of the adjective in question. Ex. Om nocnAbRrie eact, He (is) a little stronger (than) you ; &c.
§ 63. The following nouns adjective have their own peculiar forms of the degrees of comparison : —
( 30 )
great, in the sense of famous,
great, in the sense of large, Mii.ii.iii small,
BblCOKJH tall,
nusKifi lower,
xopomifi good,
xyAoU bad,
ciapbift old,
MO-iOAofi young, -\
4o.irifi long,
KpaiKifl short, J
Comparative. Full. Shortened.
Superlative.
66.ibiiiiB,
Mi'iii.niiii,
Biiic.miii,
o Ham i ft,
jyiiuifi,
xyAiiiifi,
CTapiiiniifi,
nil
& 6dibiiie,
& MeHbUie,
Bbime,
Bbicoiattmiu enaiaiiraiii.
xyrce, ciapte & ciapine,
MO-IOJKe,
& 4o.ibine,
CTapuiifi. juaAiniii. 40JH(aHuiiti. KpaTiaaniift.
§ 64. Qualifying nouns adjective can be used either in a depreciative or softened (cMariiiTeJBHbm) sense, with either full or shortened terminations ; or in an augmentative (ycnjieHHbJw) form, with either full or shortened terminations.
Depreciative or Softened.
f 6tJeobKifl AOMHKTi, little white house ;
1 6'BJOBaTbifl 40MT>, whitish house ;
( 40M^ (VkienoKT), the house (is) a little white ;
V.40MT) 6'LiOBarb, the house (is) whitish.
Ex.
Full termination
Shortened termination
Augmentative.
Full termination . . . 6i>JexOBbKifi AOMT>, very white house ; Shortened termination . dtJexoneKT) 4010 or OtJenieHCKi, the house (is) quite white.
§ 65. Certain nouns adjective are used in the sense of appellative (HapHuaie.ibHO£) nouns substantive. Ex. Bi>'i6opH&m, deputy (lit. one chosen); 4 acoBo'w, sentry ; rociHH&fl (KOMHam), drawing-room ; cwAoma (KOMHaia), dining-room; HiapKoX roast meat.
Again, other nouns adjective are converted into surnames, and are used as proper names. Ex. TOJCTOM, Tolstoi; Ba^ynaHCK/M, of Trans-Danube ; &c.
§ 66. Certain of the qualifying nouns adjective have no degrees of comparison at all; for instance, niiMow dumb, orfenoM blind, jKCHaT&r^ married ; and such other adjectives the meaning of which will not admit of an increasing or diminishing of their peculiar significations.
67. To many adjectives which denote quality of a good kind
( 31 )
the particles He not, and 6es without, can be prefixed. This process has the effect of giving- to the adjectives so treated a con- trary signification to that which they previously held. Ex. He- M ^agreeable, w^HHCT&m unclean, fascEJLbmiu powerless, &c. O&s. — The particle ties, which is called a preposition, signifies deprivation, or the want of possession of anything, no matter what. Hence many adjectives which primarily indicate bad qualities when joined with this particle or preposition, come to express on the other hand good qualities. Ex. harmless, fiesonacRbiu safe, &c.
§ 68. Certain nouns adjective, which are derived from one and the same word, may, according to their meaning, appear in two forms, viz. be either possessive or qualifying adjectives. Ex. BCMHOM, terrestrial, seio/wo^, earthern, (from 36MJi£)', seMMUucmbtu, earthy; 30.1 OTOM, golden, WJiomucmbiii, auriferous, (from 30Mmo).
§ 69. The following is the table of the declensions of nouns adjective with full terminations : —
Singular Number.
|
Cases. |
Masc. Gender. |
Fern. Gender. |
Neuter Gender. |
|
N. & V. H. 3. |
biii, oii, iii, mil. |
an, an. |
oe, ee. |
|
G. P. |
aro, aro. |
oii, eii. |
aro, aro. |
|
D. 4- |
OMy, emy. |
oil, cii. |
OMy, eMy. |
|
A. B. |
( aro, arc. ") ( MH, ofl, iii, eia. ) |
yro, row. |
( aro, aro. "£ ( oe, ee. j |
|
I. T. |
bIMl>, BMl. |
oro, OH, ero, efl. |
MM!., HM'Ii. |
|
P. H. |
OMI, esn,. |
e8. |
OM'I., CM'L. |
Plural Number.
|
Cases. |
Masc. Gender. |
Fern. Gender. |
Neuter Gender. |
|
N.&V. H. 3. |
Lie, ie. |
bia, in. |
Mii, ia. |
|
G. P. |
uix, im>. |
I.IX'L, IIXT>. |
HXT>, HXl. |
|
D. A- |
WM^, HM^. |
I.IM'f>, IIM't) |
I.IM'I,, UM'f.. |
|
A. B. |
C bixi, HXI 1 ^ we, ie. > |
f WXl, HXl. ^ i, wa, ia. j |
bie, ia. |
|
I. T. |
UMQ, iniii. |
LIMH, IIMII. |
I.IMIK IIMII. |
|
p. n. |
MX I, HXl. |
blXl, HXl. |
blXl, 0X1. |
EXAMPLES OF THE DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. With an Animate Object of the Masculine Gender.
Cases.
Singular Number.
|
H. 3.. N.& V. |
cii.ii.ni.iii ope.n>, powerful eagle. |
|
P. G. |
CHjBearo opja, of a powerful eagle. |
|
4- D. |
CHJiBHOMy op-iy", to a powerful eagle. |
|
B. A. |
co-iBnaro opja, powerful eagle. |
|
T. I. n. p. |
CIUBHblMl OPJOMT., by a powerful eagle. f r 0 CHJBHOMT. Op.lt, about a powerful eagle. |
Plural Number.
CHJBHBie Op.IbI, powerful eagles.
CHJBHWXl
of powerful eagles.
CHJBHMMX
to powerful eagles.
CHJbHblXl Op.lOBT>,
powerful eagles.
b}f powerful eagles.
0 CHJBFibixi) op^ax^, about powerful eii^les.
1 O
With an Inanimate Object of the Feminine Ge-nder.
Cases. Singular Number.
pyccKia H36bi, Russian huts.
|
H. 3. N.& V. |
pyccuaa 036a, Russian hut. |
|
P. G. |
pycCKoft 0s6bi, of a Russian hut. |
|
4- D. |
pycCKOii 03(VB, to a Russian hut. |
|
B. A. |
pyccnyio 0s6y, Russian hut. |
|
T. I. |
pyCCKOK) 0360H), with a Russian hi |
n.
j BT> pyCCKOfi
in a Russian hut.
PyCCKHXl
of Russian huts.
to Russian huts.
pyccKia H36bi, Russian huts.
PyCCKHMH 03(5aM0,
with Russian huts. Bl p^CCK0Xl H36aXT>,
in Russian huts.
Cases.
H. 3.
N.&V.
P. G.
4- D.
B. A.
T. I.
n.
p.
With an Inanimate Singular Number.
Object of the Neuter Gender.
Plural Number.
MtCTO,
former place.
M*BCTa,
of a former place.
npe;KneMy Mtciy, to a former place.
former place.
npeJKHHJTb M-ECTOMT.,
by a former place.
na
former places.
WBCTT,,
of former places.
on a former place.
MtCTHM'B,
to former places.
npe/KHia M-fecia, former places.
npe*'B0MH MtCTHM0,
by former places.
Ha npe'/KHox'B wfeciaxx, on former places.
With an Animate Object of the Masculine Gender.
Cases.
Singular Number.
|
H. 3. N.&V. |
AoCpbiii 6parb, kind brother. |
|
P. G. |
4o6paro 6pata, of a kind brother. |
|
4- D. |
4<56pOMy 6paty, to a kind brother. |
|
B. A. |
4o6paro tfpara, kind brother. |
|
T. I. |
4o6pUMi CpaiOMT), by a kind brother. |
|
n. p. |
o 4o6pOMi Opart, about a kind broth |
Plural Number.
kind brothers.
CpaTbCBl,
of kind brothers.
to kind brothers.
AoOpux-b 6paTb kind brothers.
by kind brothers.
0 jofipuxi. OparbfixT,, about kind brothers.
Cases.
With an Animate Object of the Feminine Gender.
Singular Number.
|
n. 3 N.&V. |
4<5<5pafl cecipS, a kind sister. |
|
P. G. |
466pofi cecrpft, of a kind sister. |
|
4- D. |
4o6pofi cecipt, to a kind sister. |
|
B. A. |
Ao6py» cecip^, kind sister. |
|
T. I. |
Adoporo cectporo, by a kind sister. |
|
P. P. |
o 466poti cecxp-fe, about a kind sis |
Plural Number.
cecipw, kind sisters.
ceciepi, of kind sisters.
to kind sisters.
cecxepi, kind sisters.
cecipaiaa, by kind sisters.
o AoflpMxt cecipaxi, about kind sisters.
Cases.
H. 3.
N. & V.
P. G.
4. D.
B. A.
T. I.
P.
With an Inanimate Object of the Neuter Gender.
Singular Number.
joopoe kind deed.
4o6paro
of a kind deed.
to a kind deed.
A<5(5poe kind deed.
by a kind deed.
0 4d6pOMi
about a kind deed.
Plural Number.
4ofipblfl /Vkia, kind deeds.
4o6pwxi AfaT,. of kind deeds.
4odpbiMi 4%jdv&, to kind deeds.
kind deeds.
4o(5pbiMH 4f..iaMH, by kind deeds.
0 4o(5pMXi 4-S.iaxi, about kind deeds.
With an Inanimate Object of the Masculine Gender.
|
Cases. |
Singular Number. |
|
H. 3. N&V. |
upoc.Toii KaMent., ordinary stone. |
|
P. G. |
npociaro KaMHS, of ordinary stone. |
|
4- D. |
UpOCTOMy KaMHK), to ordinary stone. |
|
B. A. |
npocTdii KaMenb, ordinary stone. |
|
T. 1. |
npOCTUM'b KUMHCMX, by ordinary stone. |
|
II. P. |
0 IIpOCTOMT> KaMIJ'6, about ordinary ston< |
Plural Number.
KUMBH,
ordinary stones.
npocTbixi
of ordinary stones.
npOCTLIMT) KaMHflM-b,
to ordinary stones.
npocTbie ordinary stones.
npOCIblMH KaMIlflMH,
by ordinary stones.
0 UpOCTblXT) KaMHHXT.,
about ordinary stones.
With an Inanimate Object of the Feminine Gender.
Cases.
Singular Number.
|
n. 3. N&V. |
npociaa uocib, common bone. |
|
P. G. |
DPOCTOH KOCTU, of common bone. |
|
4. D. |
npocidfi KOCTH, to common bone. |
|
B. A. |
npOCTyK) KOCTb, common bone. |
|
T. I. |
npOCTOH) KOCTbK), by common bone. |
|
n. P. |
o npocT<5fi K<5cTU, about common bone. |
Plural Number.
npocTbia KOCTH, common bones.
npocTbixi Kociefi, of coininou bones.
npOCTblMT> KOCTHMb, to common bones.
DpOCIblfl KOCTH, common bones.
DpOCTblMII KOCTHMH,
by common bones.
o npocibixi KOCTax^, about common bones.
With an Inanimate Object of the Neuter Gender.
Cases.
H. 3.
N.& V.
P. G.
A- D.
B. A.
T. I.
n.
P.
Singular Number.
npocT<5e paci^Hie, a common plant.
npociaro
of a common plant.
npocidMy pacieniio, to a common plant.
npocT<5e pacieHie, a common plant.
npocibiMi pacie'uieM'b. by a common plant.
o npocioMT) pacTcniH, about a common plant.
Plural Number.
ijpocTbia pacieHifl, common plants.
npocibixi pacTeniii, of common plants.
npocibiMi pacieniflMi, to common plants.
npocibifl pacteoifl, common plants.
npocibiMH
by common plants.
o npocTbixT> pacTeuiflX"b, about common plants.
With an Inanimate Object of the Masculine Gender.
Cases.
H. 3.
N. & V.
P. G.
4. D.
B.
A.
T. I.
n. P.
f&ngular Number,
.itTiiiii 4<Mib, summer day.
4HH. of a summer day.
4B», to a summer day,
4BBB, summer day.
J-STHHMI ,yu:M'b, by a summer day.
o .itTiieiTB 4Ht, about a summer day.
Plural Number.
4BH, summer days.
of summer days.
summer days.
4IIHMH,
by summer days.
0 .liiTHUX'I, 4IUIX'b,
about summer days.
Cases.
With an Inanimate Object of the Feminine Gender.
Singular Number.
|
H. 3. |
.riiinaa no'ib, |
|
N. &V. |
summer night. |
|
P. |
J'STHCH HOMU, |
|
G. |
of a summer night. |
|
4- |
.rfcTiirii Ho-JH, |
|
D. |
to a summer night |
|
B. |
r .ll»TBK>ID BOHb, |
|
A. |
summer night |
|
T. |
r , JCfiTBeH) BOlbH), |
|
I. |
by a summer night. |
|
/ f |
|
|
n. |
0 Jl1JTB<}fi HOHB, |
|
p. |
about a summer nig |
Plural Numter.
.IJ.TllJJI HOHH,
summer nights.
.liiiinixi, noiea, of summer nights.
J'tTHHM'b HOHflMl,
to summer nihis.
Hu'IlI.
summer nights.
Jt»TIIHMH HOll;niII,
by summer niglits.
O JtTHHXT, HOlaXX,
about summer lights.
Cases.
H. 3.
N.&V.
P. G.
4- D.
B. A.
T. I.
n. p.
With an Inanimate Object of the Neuter Gender.
Singular Number.
j-fcTHee OAtiuo, summer coverlet.
jtiHaro OAtiua,
of a summer coverlet.
to a summer covelet.
O4i>fl.io, summer coverlet.
with a summer coverlet.
o -itTHeMi 04ta.i1;,
about a summer coverlet.
Plural Number.
summer coverlets.
.lliTHHXT.
of summer coverltts.
to summer coverlets.
JtTHia 04*a^a, summer coverlets.
with summer coverlets.
about summer coverlets.
§ 70. Certain Possessive Adjectives which are derived from animate objects, and which terminate in itt, &/z, i>e, such as 0-ieHW -&& -be, of a deer, are declined in the following manner : —
Cases.
N.&V. H.3. G. P.
D. A. I. P.
B. T.
n.
Singular Number. Masc. Termination. Fern. Termination.
OilHM.
0-ieHbHro. o-i^Hbeiuy. o.ieHift.
oi&rfcun.
0-ieHbeMy.
O.u'HbR).
oO'b o.ienbeii. Belonging to a deer.
Plural Number.
|
Cases. |
Masc. Termination. |
Fern. Termi: |
|
N.&V. H.3. |
0.1CIILH. |
o.icubn. |
|
G. P. |
O.I£HHXT>. |
O.It'HbIIXT>. |
|
D. A. |
o.ieiibn. |
O.lOHbHMX. |
|
A. B. |
OJCHbH. |
O.ienbH. |
|
I. T. |
o.ieubiiMii. |
O.lt'HbllMn. |
|
p. n. |
061, O.I^IIbHXl. |
061 o.i^nbH |
Neuter Termination.
o.u'ubc. cueiibJiro.
O.Il'HLIIM'L.
od> O.H'HLCMI.
Neuter Termination.
O.K'HbH.
OJCHbHXl.
O.ICHLHM'b.
0.1(5HblI.
OI^HbHMH.
below.
The Possessive Adjective BOHJ/U, Divine, is declined as
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Numbei . |
||
|
Cases. |
Masculine. Feminine. |
Neuter. |
All Gender" |
|
N.&V. H.3. |
EoHtiii. E<5%ifl. |
EoJKie. |
Ed/Kin. |
|
G. P. |
EoHtifl. EoJKiett. |
Ed/Kia. |
EdHviBXi. |
|
D. 4. |
Bowiio. Bdaiieii. |
Ed»UK). |
EdJKlHMT). |
|
A. B. |
EdiKiii. E(5HJiio. |
Ed;Kie. |
Ed/Kin. |
|
I. T. |
EdJKiHMI. BoJHiCK). |
EdaciHMi. |
Ed/KiHMH. |
|
P. H. |
0 Ed>KieMX. 0 Edfltiefi. |
OEoJKiCMi. |
0 EoJKinxi. |
§ 72. The following is a table showing the several forms of the shortened terminations of possessive nouns adjective : —
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Numbei\ |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masculine. |
Feminine. |
Neuter. |
All Genders. |
|
N.&V. H 3 |
T>, b, |
a, a, |
o, e, |
LI, H. |
|
G. P. |
a, a, |
oii, eft, |
a, a, |
LIXT., BX'b. |
|
D. 4. |
V HI |
oft, eft, |
y, », |
LlMl, IIM'L. |
|
A. B. |
j a, n, j |
y, », |
o, e, |
C MXX, HXl. ") (. M, H. } |
|
I. T. |
MMI., 1IMI,, |
OH), e», |
MMI,, IIM1,, |
I.IMII, IIM1I. |
|
P. D. |
OMl, CMl, |
oft, eft. |
OMX, CHI, |
LIXl, HX'L. |
Examples of the declensions of Nouns Adjective with shortened ter- minations. Possessive adjectives derived from personal nouns (vide
§ 58, N°. 2).
Singular Number.
|
Cases. |
Masculine Gender. |
Feminine Gender. |
Neuter Gender. |
|
N. & V. H. 3 |
OiqdBi, |
CpaiBHBa, |
cecipaBO. |
|
G. P. |
OTqoBa, |
6paTBHBOfi, |
cecrpaaa. |
|
D. 4. |
OTqoBy, |
CpaTiiiuion, |
cecrpaBy. |
|
C" OTDOBa. ) |
|||
|
A. B. |
\ V ( OTMOBl, ) |
CpaiBHBy, |
cecipaBO. |
|
I. T. |
OTU,OBLIM'b, |
fipaTBIIBOIO, |
cecipuBbiMi. |
|
p. n. |
O0l OTUOBOMl, |
0 OpaTBHHOii, |
o cecxpaaoMi. |
|
Of the father. |
Of the brother. |
Of the sister. |
|
|
Plural Number. |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masculine Gender. |
Feminuie Gender. |
Neuter Gender. |
|
N.&V. fl. 3. |
OTHOBLI, |
6paTiiniiM, |
cecipaBbi. |
|
G. P. |
OTqdBWXl, |
CpaTBOBblXl, |
Ce'CTpBBMXl. |
|
D. 4- |
OTUdBLIMl, |
6paTHHin,nri>, |
ce'crpii m,i ML. |
|
A. B. |
( otqoBbixi, ") (^ OTUOBH, ) |
f fipdiBaBbixi, ") |
fcecxpHUbixi. ") (_ Ce'CTpBBW. ) |
|
I. T. |
OTqoBLIMH, |
fipaTHIIIILIMII, |
Ce'CTpBBblMH. |
|
p. n- |
o6i> orqcBbixi, |
0 CpUTBHULIXl, |
0 Ce'CTpBBblX'b. |
|
Singular Number. |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masculine Gender. |
Feminine Gender. Neuter Gender. |
|
|
N.&V. H. 3. |
HiiKii.iinn, .'Oin,,. |
EKaTCpiiiniiia 4a'ia, |
Hapunbino c«Jo. |
|
G. P. |
HiiKo.iiiiia 41111, |
Ef;aTCpiinniioii Aa-ni, |
HapuuLina cc.ia. |
|
D. 4- |
HiiKdiiiny 4BEO, |
EitaTepHHuiioii ^ait, |
I^apuqbiHy cejy. |
|
A. B. |
HsiKo.iinrb 46Bb, |
EKaiepaBHBy 4aiy, |
Hapl'mi'IMO rc.io. |
|
I. T. |
HlIKO.llIHLIM'b Alie.M'b, |
EKaiepHBiiBOK) Aa4eio, |
HapaqwiibiMi CC.IOMI. |
|
P. n. |
0 HllKd.IIIIIOM I, 4B'B, |
in, Ei;aTCpiiiuiiioii .Ta-ili, |
o IJapiiqbiHOMx CGJ-B. |
|
St. Nicholas's day. |
Catherine's country- hou so |
. Tsarina's 1 village. |
1 Title of the Russian Empress. Trans.
( 38 )
The plural of the three last examples is according to those given in the table above.
Obs. — Qualifying nouns adjective with shortened terminations are inflected only in poetry,
Ex. TaMi Symz/tfws1 cime Mope
There rages the blue sea, H £OH#y 2 40 CHH/Z MOp/J I will go to the blue sea.
Qo£iB*u0ai 8 CHHW Mop/o
I will admire the blue sea.
IIor.iflafcy4 na cime Mope
I will gaze on the blue sea.
§ 73. It is especially necessary to observe the following rules for nouns adjective : —
(1) To insure the agreement of nouns adjective with nouns sub- stantive in gender, number and case, the nominative case, plural, of the adjective in question must, if the substantive is of the masculine gender, always terminate in e. Similarly, if the substantive is of the feminine or neuter gender, the nominative case, plural, of the adjective will terminate in n. Ex. XpaSpbitf BOHHW brave warriors, from BOHH5 ; Crkibi/z crfcn&i white walls, from crfeHa ; cnaU creiua blue glasses, from cieiuo.
(2) With regard to the adjective Eomu Divine, the nominative case, plural, terminates (for all genders) in u. Ex. EojKm XpaM&i God's temples, from xpaM5 ; KOHCZ'U IJepKBM God's churches, from uepKOB& ; EoiKiw C03jdflz;& God's creatures, from C034aiii£.
(3) Adjectives derived from animate nouns, and which ter- minate in iit, have in the nominative case of the plural number &u (for all genders). Ex. (XieB&M pora, horns of a deer; Me^B'fciK&M uiyo&j, bearskin coats; DTHH&U rfilttja, birds' nests.
(4) Nouns adjective of the masculine gender terminate in ou only when the accent lies on the ante-penultimate letter. Ex. xvflow bad, H^MOU dumb, &c. When the accent is not on the ante-penultimate letter or syllable, adjectives of the masculine gender terminate in biu or iu. Ex. ^oSp&m kind,
great, &c.
1 Present tense of 6ynieBaTb. Trans. 8 Future tense of no^HBHTbca Tram.
2 Future tense of 4011410. Tram. * Future tense of norja^tib. Trans.
( 39 )
(5) Nouns adjective which terminate in niu have in the genitive case, singular, the termination mo, and are declined according to the table of nouns adjective terminating in niu ( Vide § 69). Ex. cviHiu blue, &c. All other nouns adjective ending in iu have in the following cases of the singular number the termination here specified : — In the genitive case aio, in the dative OMI/, in the instrumental UMti, in the prepositional OMV. In the plural number, however, they are declined like adjectives which terminate in niu. The following is an instance of this rule : — BBICOIWW high, &c.
The Noun of Number or Numeral.
§ 74. The numerals indicate the quantity or number of the objects spoken of. Ex. v^unt one, nepBW^ first, flibjKHHfl dozen, &c.
§75. Numerals are divided into —
(1) Cardinal (KO.iHiecTBeflHOtf), or those which point out the number of the objects, by answering to the question CKO.IBKO ? How many ? Ans. OAHHT> one, 4Ba two, &c.
(£) Ordinal (nopaflKOBoe), or those which determine the sequence or order in which one object shall follow another. The ordinals answer to the question Koiopww ? Which ? Ans. IlepB&M first, &c.
Table of the Russian Numerals.
Cardinal. Ordinal.
OJHHI, masc. o.jiia, fern. 04116, neut.
04HH, tnasc. cfc »«M£ 04 Ht, /em.
C sing.
. / \
»
twasc. an, ye7». oe, wewi.
we, masc. bin, fern, t
neut.
sing.
Plur'
gen.
5)
ipn,
iniib
ceMb,
BOCeMb
3
4 5
6
7
8
9 10
-La -fce -LH, HeTBepiwii -aa -oe -tie -LW, nHTMii, &c. inecioft, &c. ce/itMdfi, &c.
BOCbMOli, &C.
, &c.
ii, &c.
&c. iii, &c.
1st.
2nd.
3rd.
4th.
5th.
6th.
7th.
8th.
9th. 10th. llth. 12th.
cdpOKi,
Cardinal Numbers (continued).
Tpnnu,wiTb, 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5a4qaTb-04Hfli, &c. 21, &c.
30
40 50 CO 70
80 90 100 200 300 400- 500 600 700 800 900
BOCCMbAGCflTl,
AGBflHOCTO,
CTO,
Tpacia,
mecTbco'Ti,
BOCCMbCdTl,
Tbicaia,
1000 2000 10,000 100,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 Tb'icaia MH-uioHOBi, 1000,000,000 (T. e. MH.iiap,vb) (i. e. milliard) 1,000,000,000
CTO TbICflHT>,
SIH.I.lidHT>,
Ordinal Numbers (continued).
i, &c. 13th.
i, &c. 14th.
i, &c. 15th.
'«, &c. 16th.
ft, &c. 17th.
*, &c. 18th.
*> &c. 19th.
(ii, &c. 20th.
lii, &c. 21st, &c.
30th.
lii, &c. 31st, &c.
copOKOBofl, &c. 40th.
'H, &c. 41st, &c.
50th.
i, &c. 51st, &c.
iuecTH4ecaTbiii, &c. 60th.
inecTb4ecaT^-aepBLiii, &c. 61st, &c.
ceMH4ecaTbifl, 70th.
ceMb4ecaTi»-nepBbifl, &c. 71st &c.
BOCbMH4ecaTbiii, &c. 80th.
Boce.Mb4ecaTb-nepBbiii, &c. 81st, &c.
4eBHHOCTblfi, &C. 90tll.
4eBae6cTO-nepBbiii, &c. 91st, <fcc.
coibifl, «fec. 100th.
CTO-n^pBbifi, &c. 101st, &c.
4Byxi-coTbiii, &c. 200th.
4BicTH-ncpBbifl, &c. 201st, &c.
B, &c. 300th.
i, &c. 301st, &e.
i, &c. 400th.
leiupecia nepBbiH, &c. 401st, &c.
i, &c. 500th.
i, &c. 501st, &c.
i, &c. 600th.
mecTbcoTi. nepsbifl, <fec. 601st, &c.
ceMH-coibifl, &c. 700th.
ceMbcoTT) nepsbifi, &c. 701st, &c.
BOCbMH-COTblfi, &C. SOOth.
BoccMbcoii nepBbiii, &c. 801st, &c.
4eBaTH-coTbifi, &c. 900th.
4eBaTbc6iTi nepBbiii, &c. 901st, &c.
Tbicaqebifl, &c. 1000th, &c.
4Byxi-Tbica4HbiB, &c. 2000th, &c.
4ecaiH-Tb'icaHFibia, &c. 10,000th, &c.
CTO-TbicaHBbift, &c. 100.000th, &c.
MHJJiOHHblH, &C. 1000,000th, &C.
4Byxx-MH.uioHbiH, &c. 2000,000th, &c. Tbicaie MHJJiouHbifi, 1000,000,000th, &c.
6H.i.ii6HHbiii, &c. 1,000,000,000th, &c.
Fractional Numerals.
HOJOBHIia,
Tpeib,
ocbMyxa or ocbMyiima, J
no.ixopa, 1 J
nojxpexba, 2J
nojiexBepia, 3J
Circumstantial Numerals,
other. last.
Proportional Numerals.
double.
Tpoi'moft, treble.
leiBepuoB, quadruple.
or CTOpainbiii, centuple.
ipoe, iii&xepo, Aecaiepo.
Collective Numerals.
EflTCpO,
Sets of Two, &c., &c. napa pair, 66a both, ABofiKa two,
three, nnioK'b five, ten, 4K);i;unu dozen, and IIO half dozen ; ABU ^ecaiKa score, hundred.
§ 76. To the class of cardinals belong —
(1) Collective (co6HpaTej&H0e) numerals, such as nap# pair, ipoHM triplet, woe set of two, 66# both, flKMHHa dozen, &c.
(2) Fractional (woftuoe), such as HeTBepi& quarter, half, no^TOpa one-and-a-half, &c.
§ 77. Numerals, according to their composition, can be either —
(1) Simple (npocroi), or such as are formed from one primary word ; for instance, flBfl, ipw, nepBbm, &rc.
(2) Compound (cJOJKHOe), or such as are made up of two or more words: p/&-H£umaT& (4B/&-Ha-£ecaT&) twelve, naT&-4ecaiff, fifty; cro- nepB&m, hundred (and) first; &c.
§ 78. The cardinal numerals are declined like nouns substantive, and the ordinal like nouns adjective ending in &m and ou. Tpeiiw third, is declined after the manner of nouns adjective terminating in iu, which are derived from animate nouns. (Fide § 70).
§ 79. The ordinal numeral nepB&iw, when used in the sense of Jif qmrn best, or oufrrabiu excellent, has degrees of comparison— , nepB/6wmm, caM&m
§ 80. The numerals enuRbiu sole, ABOaKm two-fold, ternary, and the like, have the meaning of qualifying nouns adjective, and are declined as nouns adjective.
( 42 )
81. The declension of the cardinal numerals is as follows : Singular Number. Plural Number.
Cases.
N. H.
G. P.
D. 4-
A. B.
I. T.
P. H.
Masc.
Fern.
OAHOFO,
OABOMy,
onflow,
Neut.
OABO.
OABOro.
OABOMy.
OABO.
OABHSTb.
Masc. & Neut. OAHH,
OABHXl, 04BHMT>,
Fern.
OABt. OAB-fcX-b.
C OABH,
OABHMH,
061
one.
|
Cases. |
Masc. & Neut. Fern. |
All Genders. |
|
|
N. H. |
Asa, AB*. |
TP'B, |
leibipc. |
|
G. P. |
AByxt, AByxi,. |
ipexi, |
Heiwpex^. |
|
D. A. |
AByM-b, ABYMI. |
Tpe'MT), |
HeibipeMT,. |
|
A. B. |
(. ABa, AB*. j |
(" ipexT>, (TPH, |
leiwpe. ) |
|
I. T. |
ABJMfl, AByMfl. |
ipeMa, |
leibipbMa. |
|
P. D. |
o AByn., o AByxi. |
0 Tpexi, |
o Heibipexii. |
|
two. |
three. |
four. |
|
Cases. All Genders. |
All Genders. |
All Genders. |
All Genders. |
|
N. H. naib. |
BOCCMb. |
OAMBHa^qaTb. |
copOKi. |
|
G. P. nflTH. |
OCbMH. |
O^HBBaAUaTH. |
copOKa. |
|
D. 4. naie. |
OCbMH. |
OAHBBaAqaiH. |
copOKd. |
|
A. B. naib. |
BOCeMb. |
OAHBHa^EiaTb. |
COPOKI. |
|
I. T. naibro. |
OCeMbK). |
OAHBBaAB,aTbK>. |
copOKa. |
|
P. II. 0 DflTU. |
0 BOCbMH. |
apB OAHBBajqaiH. |
o copoKa. |
|
five. |
eight. |
eleven. |
forty. |
|
Cases. All Genders. |
All Genders. |
All Genders. |
All Genders. |
|
N. H. nflTbAecarb. |
CTO. |
ABtCTH. |
naTb-coYt. |
|
G. P. nflTMAecaiH. |
era. |
AByXT>-COTl. |
BaTH-COT^. |
|
D. 4 UflTHAeCflTH. |
ciy, cia. |
ABVMX-CTaMX. |
n/ITH-CTdMX. |
|
A. B. naibAecflTi. |
CTO. |
AB-BCTH. |
naib-corb. |
|
I. T. naiHOAecHTbio. |
cia. |
ABysia-CTaMH. |
naibio-CTaMH. |
|
P. n. o nHTHflecaTH. |
o era. |
Wb AByXT.-CTaXT>. |
o naTH-craxi. |
|
fifty. |
a hundred. |
two hundred. |
five hundred. |
( 43 )
Cases.
N. H.
G. P.
D. 4.
A. B.
I. T.
p. n.
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Number. |
|
All Genders. |
All Genders. |
|
TucaiH, T&Cflll;, |
TLICfllH. T&CH'Il. •iMnn;uri>. |
|
TUCfliew, |
T&CfliaMH. |
thousand.
When before the genitive, dative, and prepositional cases of tfoceMb, prepositions terminating with a vowel are used, in place of OCLMH it is usual to write 06cbMH. Ex. y 06cbMH yHeHHKo'tftf, with eight pupils ;
, for eight soldiers ; o 06cbMn KHiir0#5,
books.
eight
. — The dative case of the numerals copOKi> and CTO, when used with the preposition no up to, terminates in y, and not in a. Ex. Hait £a.iH no cry py6.iew, They gave them 100 roubles each.
§ 82. HlecTfr (6), CCM& (7), ^eBais (9), and ^ecfli& (10), are declined like nai& (5); 4BinaAuai& (12), TpimaAuaT& (13), Heiwp- (14), namaAuaT& (15), inecTHa^aaTft (16), ceMHa(nnai& (17), (18), 4eB}ITHa4^aT6 (19), ABa#aaT& (20) and TpKA^aTft (30),likeo^HnaAuaT& (11) ; mecTb^ecaTS (60), and ceMb^ec/iTS (70), like naTbAecaT& (50) ; BOceMb^ecais (80), like BOCCM& (8) and flecai& (10) joined together ; ACBJIHOCTO (90), like CTO (100) ; ipncTO (300), and neibipecm (400), like ABtciw (200; ; inecibcoTS (600) , ceMbcoxg (700), (800), and 4eBaTbc6i& (900), like naibcois (500).
§ 83. With regard to the declension of the cardinal numerals, it must be observed that, in the instances of o^HHtf, #B0, ipw, qeib'ipe, the accusative case is like the nominative or the genitive, according to whether the noun denned by the numeral in question is animate or inanimate. In the instances, however, of the rest of the cardinal numerals commencing with nai& five, the accusative case is like the nominative, without distinction as to the nouns being animate or inanimate.
84. Examples of the Declension of the Collective and Fractional
Numerals.
|
Cases. |
Masc. & Neut. Fern. |
For all Genders. |
|
N. H. |
<5<5a, 66t. |
ip6e. qexBepo. |
|
G. P. |
OOOHX'b, 06-fcnXX. |
ipoaxx. ^etBep^ixx. |
|
D. 4. |
060HMT>, 06'BQM'b. |
TpOHMX. ^GTBepblMX. |
|
A. B. |
COOOHXX, 061JHXX. (. 66a, 66t. |
TpOHXT). HGTBepblXX. ipoe. qeiBepo. |
|
I. T. |
060HMH, 061JHMH. |
TpOlIMIl. leiBCpblMH. |
|
p. n. |
BT> odOMxi, npn oOiaxx. |
o ipOHxx. ea leisepbixx. |
|
both. |
set of three. set of four. |
|
|
ABOC set of two, and o6oe both, are declined like ipoe ; naiepo set of five, meciepo |
||
|
set of six, |
&c., are declined like leiBepo. |
|
|
Cases. |
Masc. and Neut. Fern. All Genders. |
|
|
N. H. |
nojTOpa, n(mopbi, no-iTOpacia. |
|
|
G. P. |
nojyropa, no^yxopbi, nojiyTOpacia. |
|
|
D. 4. |
nojyiopy, nojyiopt, no^yiopaciy. |
|
|
A. B. |
nojiopa, nojiopbi, eojuopacTa. |
|
|
I. T. |
nojyTOpbiMi, nojyTOporo, nojytopacTa. |
|
|
P. H. |
o nojyTOpt, B'b nojyiopt, o no^yiopacxt. |
|
|
one and a half. one hundred and fifty. |
||
|
§85. |
In the instances of the compound cardinal numerals, every |
|
|
word is |
declined, together with the substantive and adjective with |
|
|
which they may be joined : — |
||
|
N. H. |
ipHcra co.i£aii. |
ceMbcorb HOBbixx KHnri,. |
|
G. P. |
Tpe'XT) COTb COJA^Tl. |
C6MHCOTX HOBblXX KHIirb. |
|
I). 4. |
Tpe'Ml CiaMl COJ4HTaAIl. |
CCMHCTaMX HUBblMl KHUFaMX. |
|
A. B. |
/ f TplICTa C0.1A<lTb. |
CCMbCOTX UOBblXX KHHFX. |
|
I. T. |
ipeiwa ciaMH coJAaiaMH |
CBMblOCTaMH HOBblMII KHHraMH. |
|
p. n. |
o xpe'xx ciaxi; co.i^aTaxi. |
o ceMiicxaxx OOBWXX KHiiraxx. |
|
three hundred soldiers. |
seven hundred new books. |
|
|
N. n. |
leibipecia 4Ba4qaib O^HHT, py6jb. |
|
|
G. P. |
qeTbipe'xicorb ABaAuaTii OAHOFO py6jn. |
|
|
D. 4- |
ieTbipeMT>CTaMT> ABa^ijaTH OAHOMy py6.iio. |
|
|
A. B. |
qeibipecia 4BdAqaib OAHHI pyfijb. |
|
|
I. T. |
qeibipbinacTaMH 4Ba4uaTbio O^HUMI py6.ie'Mi. |
|
|
p. n. |
o leTbipexiciaxT. 4Ba4qaiu OAHOMT. pyfi^-B. |
four hundred and twenty-one roubles.
( 45 )
N. H. i6cflia BoceMb corLipM^qaTB mem pyo'.ie'fl,
G. P. TftCH^H OCbMH COTl TpO/jqaTH HI6CTH py6j£ft,
D. 4- TijicflTB OCBMH ciasn TpHfluaTH mecTH py6.i»iMT>,
A. B. TLicaiy Bocenib coil TpH/waTb niecTb py&i£&,
I. T. TbiCHiero BoceMbio CTUMH Tpe/maibK) luecibio
P. II. 0 TblCHTB OCbMH CTaXl TpHAqaTH 1H6CTH pyfl.JHX'b,
one thousand eight hundred and thirty-six roubles.
§ 86. The last word of the compound ordinal numerals is alone declined with the substantive and the adjective joined thereto. Ex. N. H. T&cflia B<5ceMb corb Tpe^qaib mecioii 1*041.
G. P. „ „ „ „ mecraro ro^a.
D. 4. „ „ „ „ raecT6Myrd4y.
A. B. „ „ „ „ nieciofi FOA*.
I. T. „ „ „ „ inecT^iMi roAOMi.
P. n. .0 „ „ „ ,, uiecioMi r<54t!.
the »ne thousand eight hundred and thirty-sixth year.
§ 87. Ordinal numerals, like nouns adjective, terminate in ou only when the accent falls on the ante-penultimate letter. Ex. Biopow, second; IUCCTOM, sixth ; BOCbMOM, eighth ; &c.
§ 88. When the collective and fractional numerals are declined with nouns substantive, the numeral in question is alone subject to inflection, the substantive remaining in the genitive case.
Ex. N. H. flecflTOKi rpynii, napa Jornada, i^TBepib
G. P. 4ec4iKa rpyin-b, napw
D. 4- aecsTKy rpymi, nap-6
A. B. ^ecflTOKi rpynn>, napy
I . T. flecflTKOMi rpyini, naporo JOinaA^fi, q^TBepTbio JHCT&.
P. H- o aecaTKt rpymi, o napt joraa4efi, o ^TBCPTH ancia.
set of ten pears, pair of horses, leaf of paper,
from rpyraa. from .lomaflb. from .IHCTX, &c.
THE PRONOUN
§ 89. The pronoun is used in place of a noun.
§ 90. Pronouns are —
(1) Personal (JHHHO^) : Ex. of first person, ff I, MM we ; of second person, mbi thou, 6bi you ; of third person, o«» he, ona she, OHO it ; OHU they (masc. and neut. genders), onri> they (fern, gender). Ex. ff nniwy,1 I am writing; mbi o^eHB npnjeHt^wK,2 thou (art) very diligent ; o«& 4o6pbiw TOBapnm», he (is) a good comrade ; OHU they went away.
1 Present tense of nncarb. Trans. 2 Shortened form of npH.ie'jKHbiB. 3 Past tense of yixaib. Trans.
( 46 )
(2) Reflective (B03BpaiHO^), or those which show that the person or persons, or thing or things, perform an action which is reflected back to the agent or agents. There is in the Russian language but one such pronoun for both numbers and all genders. This is ce6v?, self. Ex. Om OTKaabiBaems ce&"/& BT, nam/fe, He denies himself food; Tbi 40BOJ^& cooow, Thou (art) satisfied with thyself; OHU o ce6n He 3a6oT.#wcfl, They do not take care of themselves.
(3) Demonstrative (yKaaaieJBHoe), or those which serve to indicate any kind of object; such as, ceu, cifi, cie, ciu, this, these; dmoms -a -o -w, this, these; moms -a -o -76, that, those; OHbiu -an -oe -bie -MX this one, that one, or the said; maKou -an -6e -bie -bin suoh a one, &c. Ex. Bmomv ^OMS KpacHB5, a toms 6e3o6pa3e/f&, This house (is) pretty, but that one (is) ugly.
(4) Possessive (npHTfljKaiejfcHO^), or those which denote to which of the three persons an object belongs ; such as MOU -A -e -u, my, or mine ; meou -A -e -u, thy or thine ; eto, his or its (lit. of him or of it); ceou -H -e -u, his, her, its or their own; Hams -a -e -u, our, ours ; earns -a -e -w, your, yours ; uxs, their or theirs (lit. of them). Ex. BOIT. MOM cmitf, Bam# Kunra, TBO* nepo, Here (is) my table, your book, thy pen.
(5) Relative (oTHOCHieJLHO^), or those which are used in place of nouns, and which form a connection between the person or persons speaking and the object or objects about which they speak ; such as, nomopuu -an ~oe, who, which, what ; Koil -OH -oe, who, which, what ; Kmo, who ; umo, what ; ueu -bH -be -bu, whose ; Kanou -an -oe, what sort of. Ex. H Kynw^5 Knnry KOiopyw flafiiio JKCJa./z& HMto&, I have bought a book, which I have long wished to have.
(6) Interrogative (BonpociiTeJBHoe), or those which, in form, are the same as the relative pronouns, and which by means of questions endeavour to ascertain to whom or to what an object belongs. Ex. KoTopb^t nac&? What o'clock (is it)? Kmo npHWeUS? Who has come? *ieu AOM5? Whose house (is) it?
(7) Definite (onpefl'kiHTeJBHOtf), or those which point with preciseness to the person or object spoken of ; such as, caMS -d -6 -u ; caMbiu -an -oe -bie -bw, the same, the very same ; eecb, ecu, ecii, ecn, the whole, all ; mwdbiu -an -oe -bie -bin, each one, every one. Ex. OHT. caMS 6bU& Taint, He himself was there ; fl
, I saw this same book.
( 47 )
(8) Indefinite (neonpeflixieHHOtf), or those which speak some- what uncertainly of a person or thing ; such as, HibKmo, somebody ; nfbumo, something ; nfbKomopbiu -an -oe -we -bia, someone, a certain one ; HUKmo, nobody ; nuumo, nothing ; Kmo, any one ; Koe-umo, something; UHOU -an ~6e -we -bin, another; Kmo-Mi6o, somebody or other; umo Mi6o, something or other ; Kmo-Hu-6ydb, somebody or other . umo-HU-6ydb, something or other. Ex. BT> Hi>KOTOp0.M5 rop04/& SLUM pas-iHHH&J/z 3.ioynoTpe6.ieHi/?, In a cer tain city there were abuses of various kinds ; OHT> «#niiC£U5 noe-umo nowe, He wrote something new.
To the class of indefinite pronouns belongs the word H'fecKOJBKm -an -oe -bie -WA, some, a few. This word is used, however, only in the oblique cases of the plural number. Ex. Hi>CKO.iF>KW#ff, H'BCKOJS-
KtUC5, HliCKOJLKtUW, 0 H.ijCKO.IBKW#&.
Obs. — The pronoun ec&ttiU -an -oe -we -bin every one, all, is a definite pronoun when used in the sense of Kawdbiu -an *oe -we -bin, each one. Ex. BCSKW (HJH KaHt^ww) ooaaans TpyAHW&Cfl, Each one (is) obliged to labour. And it is an indefinite pronoun when used in the sense conveyed in the following sentence : 3^CL poAHica BCHK^O po^fl X-iiSff, Corn of every kind grows here.
The cardinal numeral oduuv, one, a, an, has sometimes the meaning of an indefinite pronoun. Ex. OAM«& MOW npiaie^ft ompa- BHJCH BT> JioH^OHS, A (certain) friend of mine has set out for London. In this sentence odunv stands for HfbKomopbiu or w'bKmo.
§ 91 . Some of the pronouns are declined as substantives, and others as adjectives. The pronouns declined as substantives are the following : — the personal, n, mbi, Mbi, 6bi, o#&, ona, OHO, OHU, oiifb; the reflective, ce6n ; some of the relative or interrogative, such as Kmo, umo ; and the indefinite, uuKmo, Huumo, HJbKmo, Hnumo. All the others, which have for each gender a special termination, are declined as adjectives.
§ 92. Declension of the Pronouns.
(1) Pronouns declined like substantives : —
Singular Number.
Fern. Neut.
(ma she. oed it.
ea, er<5.
efl, eMy.
ee, erd.
ilO, HMl.
npa eett, B
|
Cases. |
All Genders. |
Masc. |
||
|
N. |
H. |
II, |
Tu thou. |
OHI he. |
|
G. |
P. |
M6HJ4, |
xedfl, |
erd, |
|
D. |
A. |
MHt, |
Te6t, |
CMy, |
|
A. |
B. |
Mean, |
Te<5«. |
erd, |
|
I. |
T. |
MHdH), |
T(X5dH),f |
HMl, |
|
P. |
n. |
000 MH'li |
aa leG*, |
0 Hi'MX, |
|
Plural Number. |
||||
|
Cases. |
All Genders. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
|
N. H. |
Mfai we, Bbi you. |
OBH they. |
oe* they. |
OBH they. |
|
G. P. |
Hact, BacT>, |
HXl, |
HXl, |
HXI. |
|
D. 4- |
IWM'L, BaMTi, |
HMT>, |
HMT>, |
DMT.. |
|
A. B. |
Haci>, Baci, |
HXt, |
HXX. |
Hit. |
|
I. T. |
IIHMH, BilMH, |
HMH, |
HMH, |
IIMII. |
|
P. H. |
o iiaci., na Baci, |
0 HHXX, |
0 HHXT), |
BT» HIIXX. |
. — With regard to the declension of the pronouns of the third person OH5,OH«,OH0, OHw,OH'B,it is necessary, when prepositions are used with the oblique cases of such pronouns, to prefix the letter H to the case in question ; thus, y wero MOH HOJK&, He has my knife ; fl n#y Kt WCMJ, K5 WCH, en HHMT> en weio, en WHMH, I go to him, to tier, with him, with her, with them. But if the genitive case of this pronoun, both singular and plural, is used in the sense of a possessive pronoun, then the letter H is not prefixed. Ex. fl 6biM y eto npiaiej^, y ek Gpaifl, H y HXt cecipw, I was at his friend's, at her brother's, and their sister's.
The following are declined in one number only : —
N. H. nil KTO who?
G. P. ce6i, of self. KOFO,
D. 4. ce6t, KOM£,
A. B. ce6fl, Koro,
P. n. o ceo"*, o KOMI,
HTO, what. BHITO, nothing. BHierd.
IJBHTO, no one.
BBKOrd, HBKOMy, HBKOr6, HBHtMl, OB 0 KdMT),
Koe-Kid, KTO-Jiido, KTO-He6^AB are declined like KTOJ and Roe-lid, HTO-^a6o, TTO-
, like ITO.
HTO,
TBMX, 0
HHHTd. BHH'BM'b. HH 0
(2) Pronouns declined like adjectives : —
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Number, |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
All Genders. |
|
N. H. |
MOH, my, mine. |
MOB, |
Moe. |
MOH. |
|
G. P. |
Moerd, |
Moefl, |
Moero. |
MOHXT). |
|
D. 4. |
M06My, |
MA, |
MoeMy. |
MOH.MT,. |
|
A. B. |
( Moero, ") ( MOH, j |
MOW, |
Moe. |
( M01IXX. ^ ( MOH. ) |
|
I. T. |
1 |
MO^K), |
MOBMl. |
MOHMII. |
|
P. H. |
0 MOe'Mt, |
0 M0e*fi, |
0 MOe.MT). |
0 MOHXl. |
Tfidfi -& -e -^, thy, thine, theirs, their ; CBOH -a -e -rf, his, her, its, their own, are
declined like Noii -« -e -H.
( 49 )
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Number. |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
All Genders. |
|
N. H. |
nami., our, ours |
, BaBia, |
same. |
Damn. |
|
G. P. |
Bauiero, |
sauiefl, |
B^raero. |
flauinxi. |
|
D. A- |
Banieiay, |
Haul cii, |
Hamemy. |
BUUIBMl. |
|
A. B. |
f Baniero, ") ( Bami, y |
udmy, |
Baiiie. |
f BamHXi. ^ Bam if. |
|
I. T. |
Haiinnn,, |
naniew, |
BaOIHMl. |
liaiiiinui. |
|
p. n. |
0 nalllCMT,, |
0 iiaincii, |
o eamejii. |
0 BaiUHXl. |
|
Bami, -a, |
-e, -H, is declined like |
iiamx, -a, -e -H. |
||
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Number. |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
All Genders. |
|
N. H. |
cefi, this, |
cli, |
ci6. |
hese. |
|
G. P. |
cer<5, |
cefi, |
cerd. |
CHIT,. |
|
D. A- |
ceMy, |
ceii, |
ceMy. |
CRHl. |
|
A. B. |
Ccero, ") (. cefi, ) |
Ctaft, |
CM. |
f CHXl. (ell |
|
I. T. |
CHMl, |
C^H), |
eiun. |
CHHH. |
|
p. n. |
ocen, |
o cefi, |
o ceiii. |
0 CHXl. |
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Number. |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
All Genders. |
|
N. H. |
TOTI, that, |
Ta, |
TO. |
T*, those. |
|
G. P. |
Tor6, |
TOfi, |
Toro. |
Ttx*. |
|
D. A- |
TOMy, |
TOfi, |
TOM^. |
T'liMX. |
|
A. B. |
f lord, } ( TOTl, ) |
Ty, |
TO. |
(T*. |
|
I. T. |
TtMT., |
TOH), |
Tto. |
nm. |
|
P. H. |
0 TOMl, |
0 TOfi, |
0 TOMl. |
0 TtXl. |
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Number. |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
All Genders. |
|
N. H. |
feoii, this, |
fea, |
£TO. |
fee. |
|
G. P. |
feoro, |
feoff, |
feoro. |
feaxx. |
|
D. .4. |
feomy, |
feoff, |
feoiay. |
DFIIMI. |
|
A. B. |
C^ioro, ") |
fey, |
feo. |
f 5THXI. ^ fell. |
|
I. T. |
feHMX, |
6lOK), |
fenn. |
BT0MH. |
|
P. H. |
«<5l> feoMT>, |
061 feofi, |
•0(5l 9TOMT), |
O6l> BTHXT). |
E
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Number. |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut, |
Mas.Fem.& Neut. |
|
N. H. |
OHMfi, |
6naa, |
dHoe. |
dHbie, oHbifl. |
|
this or that one, |
these or those. |
|||
|
the said, |
the said. |
|||
|
G. P. |
oHaro, |
deofl, |
oearo. |
OOblXl. |
|
D. 4- |
deoMy, |
OHOfi, |
OHOMy. |
6HbIMT>. |
|
A. B. |
foearo, ") I OHblfi, j |
deyio, |
6Hoe. |
C dnxbii. \ oHbie, oHbia. |
|
I. T. |
uIIHMX, |
onoio, |
dHblMl. |
dHMMH. |
|
p. n. |
061 deosTB, |
o6i> oeofi, |
061 OOOMI. |
c6x dHbixi. |
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Number. |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
All Genders. |
|
N. H. |
left, whose, |
ibfl, |
ibe. |
IbQ. |
|
G. P. |
iberd, |
Hbefi, |
Hberd. |
^bBXl. |
|
D. 4- |
HL6M^, |
Hbefi, |
HbeMy. |
qbHMl. |
|
A. B. |
fibertf, ") iiefi, j |
IbK), |
ibe. |
( HbHXl. [ IbH. |
|
T. T. |
IMIMT,, |
Hb£lO, |
nan. |
1LHMIK |
|
P. H. |
o ibe'Mi, |
o Hbett, |
o ibe'srb. |
0 IbHXX. |
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Number. |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
Mas.Fem.&Neut. |
|
N. H. |
icaicoii, |
•Utfiff. |
naKoe. |
Kiiia'e, Kaitia. |
|
what sort, |
||||
|
G. P. |
Kaicoro, |
KaKdft, |
KaKdro. |
Kanrixx. |
|
D. 4- |
KaKdMy, |
KaKdfi, |
KaKoMy. |
KaiaiMi,. |
|
A. B. |
CuaKdro, ") (Kandfi, j |
KaKyH), |
Kanoe. |
( icaiuixx. (KaKie, Kanifl. |
|
I. T. |
KaKHMX, |
KaKdro, |
Eaiin. |
lulKllMII. |
|
P. H. |
BX KaKdMT), |
El KaKdii, |
Bit lulKOMl). |
BX lulKUXX. |
|
TaKoti, £fl, de, ie, ifl, are declined in |
the same manner. |
|||
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Number. |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
All Genders. |
|
N. H. |
caMi>, alone, |
caiwa, |
cai«6. |
CUMH. |
|
G. P. |
caiuord, |
CAMdl, |
caMord. |
caMiixx. |
|
D. 4- |
caMOMy, |
caMofl, |
caMOMy. |
CaMHMT). |
|
A. B. |
( caMord, ) ( caMi, j |
f caMyro,) \ camoe, > |
cano. |
/ caMexi. t CaMH. |
|
I. T. |
CaMHMt, |
caMdro, |
CaMHMl. |
CaMQMH. |
|
P. H. |
0 C;iM<)M'I,, |
o caMdfi, |
0 CaMOMX. |
0 CaMHXT>. |
|
Singular Number. |
Plural Number. |
|||
|
Cases. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
Mas. Fern . &Neut |
|
N. H. |
caMbitt, the very, the self same. |
caHafl, |
ca.Moe. |
caMbie, caMMH, these or those very, the self |
|
same. |
||||
|
G. P. |
caMaro, |
caMoli, |
cainaro. |
caubixi. |
|
D. 4- |
CaMOMy, |
cii.MOii, |
CdMOMy. |
caMUMi. |
|
A. B. |
(" cfiMaro, "£ \ CHMblfi, ) |
caMy», |
cauoe. |
fcdMMXl. ( C.'lM WC, CUMMH. |
|
I. T. |
CaMUMT., |
caMoro, |
CaMMM'B. |
CUMWMII. |
|
p. n. |
0 CilMOM'b, |
o cu.MOii, |
0 CUMOM't. |
o caMbixi. |
|
• |
Singular Number. |
Plural Number. |
||
|
Cases. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
All Genders. |
|
N. H. |
BGCb, all, the whole. |
BCH, |
Bee. |
BCt. |
|
G. P. |
Bcero, |
Bcefi, |
Bcerd. |
BCtXl. |
|
D. 4. |
BceMy, |
Bcett, |
BCGMy. |
BCtMl. |
|
A. B. |
( Bcero, ^ | Becb, | |
BCH), |
Bee. |
{BCtXX. BCt. |
|
I. T. |
BC'BM'b, |
BCCK), |
BCtMX. |
Bci.MH. |
|
P. H. |
060 BC6MI, |
ea Bccii, |
UPII BCtJMT). |
BO BCtXl. |
The pronoun nfbKmo is used only in the nominative case, and bwno only in the nominative and accusative cases. Ex. Nibumo KO
/b npHXOAH^^, somebody came to me ; fl CKaaty BaM^ Hibumo HOBO^ I will tell you something new. For the other cases of these two pronouns the oblique cases of Kmo-mo and umo-mo are substituted. Ex. Koeo-wo ntrL, £0/00 0^2 (is) wanting; KO^-TO CKy^HO, some one (is) dull ; H^O-TO ne £OCTam5, something is not obtainable ; H/&JW5-TO ero Harpa^^m^, they will reward him with something. All the other pronouns are declined like adjectives with full ter- minations.
THE VERB (Fiard!*)-
§ 93. A Verb denotes the action or condition of an object. Ex. , to praise; XBa^UTbca, to praise one's self, to boast; 6bimb , to be praised, &c.
§ 94. Verbs are divided, according to their signification, into the following Voices (Sajortf) : —
( 1) Active (^HCTBHTeJBHbm), which denotes an action that passes from the agent to the object. Now, as the greater part of verbs of the active voice require the accusative case, their class can be
( 52 )
ascertained by the questions Roio ? Whom? *Im 6? What? Ex. fl Xfia.170 (Koto) ? I praise (whom) ? Ans. EpaT#, Brother, fl HHiaw *lmo ? I am reading (what) ? Ans. KnHry, a book.
(2) Neuter (cpe^Hw), which, being the opposite of the active voice, denotes some kind of condition or action that does not pass from the agent to any object, but which is complete in itself. Ex. Hdmu, to go (once) ; xo^itt&, to go (more than 'once) ; cnaw&, to sleep ; i>x#w&, to drive ; ujL&Kamb, to weep.
Obs. — (1) The verbs 6bimb,to be, and cmamb, to become, to begin, which are of the neuter voice, are called Auxiliary (ficnoMora- Te^LH&m) Verbs, because they assist in forming the tenses of other verbs. Ex. fl §ydy HHiam&, I will read ; Tbi 6buz Ha- rpaJKA^wff, Thou wast rewarded ; OHT> ciaM nvicdmb, He began to write. The verb fibimb when used separately stands in the place of the verbs cymecTBOBawi&, to be, to exist, and , to find oneself, to exist, to be. Ex. y wero ecmb , He has books, lit. (there) are books with him ; fl 6tU5 y GpaVra, I was at (my) brother's. The verb 6bimb is in such instances called a Substantive Verb (cymecTBUTe.ibH&ZM i\iaro.i&).
Obs. — (2) All Verbs which give expression to the call or cry of the several four-footed animals or of birds are of the neuter voice. Ex. .leBtf pbiKaewtf, the lion roars, from p&i- Kait ; M6ABi>A& pefiemtf, the bear growls, from pefitiL ; co6aKa H .IHCHU0 .lawmtf, the dog and the fox bark, from
ewis, the crow caws, from KapKaib ; copoKtf J, the magpie chatters, from meoeiait ; jouia4& the horse neighs, from pjKaib ; BO.IK5 BoeiT>, the wolf howls, from BbiTB ; 6biK5 H KOpoBrt Mbi4aT&, the bull (or ox) and the cow low, from Mbinaib; OBUO- 6.iem5, the sheep bleats, from 6.ieflTb; KotWKa MflVKaems, the cat mews, from MflVKaib ; xpK)Kaewi5, the pig grunts, from xpioKaib ; rojy6& the pigeon coos, from BOpitOBaib ; Kypima niomemv, the hen clucks, from luoxiaib ; ^aryniKa KBaKams, the frog croaks, from KBaKaib ; cipeKoaa H nne^a jKyHUKaitf, the dragon-fly and the bee buzz, from
(3) Reflective (B03BpaTH&m), which indicates an action that is reflected back from the object to the agent. The reflective verbs of the Russian language are formed by the union of a verb of the active voice with a contracted form of the reflective pronoun
( 53 )
ce6a (en). Ex. XBa.m/w&ca = xeajitto ce6a, to praise one's self; = MBI/W& ce6a, to wash one's self.
(4) Reciprocal (B3aHMH&m), which denotes a reciprocal action between the agent and the object or objects. Verbs of this voice also terminate in en. They answer, moreover, to the questions — CT> K-EM't ? With whom ? Ex. ccopwm&ca, to quarrel ; cpaJKa/n&ca, to fight ; &c.
Obs. — There are some verbs without the suffix en that have the meaning of verbs of the reciprocal voice. Ex. cn6pwm&, to dispute; 'irpom&j to play. All such answer to the question, C't K-BMT. ? With whom ?
(5) Common (66mm). These likewise terminate in en, and without the particle they are not used. They have the meaning of verbs of either the active or neuter voice. Ex. Go/rw&ca, to fear, to be afraid of ; Koro? nero? of whom ? of what ? noBHHOBa/r&ca, to be obedient to; KOMy? HCMy? to whom? to what? na^/zm&ca, to rely on ; na Koro, na HTO ? on whom ? on what ? ipy^w&ca, to labour ; naA'B H^MI ? at what ? (The above have the meaning of verbs of the active voice.) YjwSam&ca, to smile ; OHVTww&ca, to appear ; and jtHwm&ca, to be lazy ; have the meaning of verbs of the neuter voice.
(6) Passive (cipaAaTe.iBH&m), which betokens the condition of one object with the action of another. Ex. 6ww& JioSaMy, to be loved, &c. Verbs of the passive voice are formed by joining an active verb with various parts of the auxiliary verb GBITB. They answer to the questions, idjMi ? HtMT> ? ly whom ? by what ? Sometimes verbs of the passive voice terminate in en. Ex. IIOHH-
, to be respected, &c.
% 95. Certain verbs, according to the meaning which they convey, are of various voices. Ex. Active Verb — OHT. Hrpaems Ha CKpnnK^ HOB^W ntcHW, He is playing a new song on the violin. Neuter yerl _ OHT> ne yHHic^, a Brpaems, He does not study, but plays. Reciprocal Verb — fl 6eLrca CT> HHMT> na pannpa#ff, I fenced with him (lit. fought with rapiers with him). Eeflective Verb — fl flojro HaAT> STOW mfaeio, I laboured for a long time over this
( 54 )
problem ; &c. Verbs of the Neuter Voice before which certain prepositions are placed become Verbs of the Active Voice : —
Ex. : Neuter Verb, E^IU, to go ; Active Verb, nepeEftTu, to go across. „ „ X04HT&, to go; „ „ 0#xo£nT&, to go round. „ „ cnai&, to sleep ; „ „ npocuan, to oversleep.
§ 96. The properties of Russian verbs which render them liable to changes of termination are — mood (HaiuoHeme) , tense (BpeM/z), aspect (BHAT>), person (AKHO), number (nncwio), gender (po^tf), par- ticiple (npnHacT^), gerund
§ 97. The mood gives expression to various forms of action or of condition, either in the person or agent.
§ 98. Russian verbs have three moods : —
(1) Infinitive (Heonpe/j'fe.ieHHOi?), which does not show by whom or when the action was performed ; i. e. which does not point out the time, or number and gender of the person or persons, at which, and by whom, the action was performed. Ex. nncaw&, to write ; , to fight ; &c.
(£) Indicative (HatflBiiTeJBiioe), which shows by whom and when the action was performed — which shows, in fact, the time and number, and even the gender, of the person or persons, at which, and by whom, the action was performed. Ex. H nnwy, I am writing; TLI cpaJKa^ca, thou foughtest; on# Hrpiutf, she played; &c.
(3) Imperative (IIoBe.iHTe.iBH0<?), which conveys an order, wish, or prohibition, for or against a thing being done. Ex. UHWU, write (thou) ; nyciB OHI AiuaerB, let him do (it) ; He cpa/Kanxecb, do not (you) fight; &c.
Obs. — In order to express by means of a Russian verb the sub- junctive (cocJiaraTe.iBHoe), or conditional (^CA6^Eoe),mood, which is in use in foreign languages, the conjunction 6bi is added to the past tense of the verb in question. Ex. fl KOHHM./J& 6bi 3T0 Aiuo, ecJH fibi HMiu& Aocyrff, I would have finished this business if I had had time ; &c.
99. The tense of a Russian verb shows either that the action
( 55 )
of the agent is now taking place, or that it has taken place at some time or other before, or that it will yet take place. And therefore a Bussian verb has three tenses, viz. present (Hacioamee), past (npo- , and future (6yAymt?e).
§ 100. The aspect of a Russian verb shows the difference of time required for the performance of an action. Ex. OH& piiuajt, he was deciding ; OH& ptmHJ5, he has decided; OH& KpHiw^uff, he shouted (once) ; OH& xa3KHBaJ5, he used to walk (habitually}.
§ 101. Russian verbs have four Aspects: (1) imperfect (necOBep- (2) perfect (coBepmeHH&m) ; (3) perfect of unity (O^HO- (4) iterative (MHoroKpaiHWw). The present tense has no
aspects. The past tense may have all four. The future tense has
three , viz. imperfect, perfect, and. perfect of unity.
§ 102. The signification of the several aspects is as follows : —
(1) The imperfect aspect denotes either that the action has not altogether ceased, or that it will not finish. Ex. fl uncaM, I wrote; fl 6y#y nncam&, I will be writing; &c.
(2) The perfect aspect denotes either that the action has been quite completed, or that it will definitely cease. Ex. fl Hannca^ffj I have written (once for all) ; fl Hanwuy, I will write (finally}.
(3) The aspect of the perfect of unity denotes either that the action has taken place or will take place once, and that rapidly. Ex. Tbi crfmyM, thou hast knocked ; fl CT^K«y, I am going to knock.
(4) The iterative aspect denotes that the action has taken place several times. Ex. fl HHTW&U&, I used (often) to read ; Ofl5
He was in the habit of walking.
Obs. — Russian verbs admit, too, of a fifth aspect being added, that of the inchoative (HaHHHaiejBH&jw) . This aspect denotes that any sort of action has merely been begun. Ex. fl sa- irlus = fl HaHdUtf nfcr&, I began to sing ; OETL 3« nrpaewtf = 0H5 HaH/t£m5 wrpam& cwo MHHvry, He will begin to play this minute ; Bfrrep* uodyM = Bi>Tep& Hana^s Ayib, The wind began to blow.
( 56 )
§ 103. The infinitive mood does not indicate the time at which an action takes place, yet it has all four aspects : (1) imperfect, CTy*iati>, to knock; (2) perfect, /iGCTyiaiB, to knock a little ; (3) perfect of unity, ciyKwym&, to give a knock ; (4) iterative, wyKueamb, to knock repeatedly.
\ 104. The indicative mood comprises all the tenses and all the aspects pertaining to those tenses.
§ 105. The imperative mood, although it does not possess tenses, has three aspects : (1) imperfect, ciyw, knock (thou) ; (2) perfect of unity, CTJKHU, knock (thou) once ; (3) perfect, nociyuu, knock (thou) a little.
§ 106. Russian verbs have three persons, which are usually represented by the personal pronouns: — 1st person, a, MM; 2nd person, TBI, BBI ; 3rd person, OH&, OHa, OHO, QRU, OH/&. Ex. fl. nmiuy, MM uuweMV, mbi UEwewb, ebi n&weme; OH& nnctLfB, OHO- uvicdja, OHO' EECCLJO, OEU or OH/& DHCCUU.
§ 107. The two Numbers of Russian Verbs are the Singular and the Plural. The former denotes the action or condition of one agent
o
or object: Ex. fl cipow, Jam building (a house). The latter points to the action or condition of two or more agents or objects : Ex. MBI CTp6w.M&, We are building (a house).
§ 108. The use of the gender in Russian verbs is confined to the past tense. Ex. fl HHia.i&, ona HHiaia, OHO HJH AHW/Z Hniajo, /read, she read, it or the child read.
§ 109. A participle is an adjective formed from a verb. Ex. 6orama70w^'w CBOM yM5 H&ymMu 6yAewB no.ie3e«& ce6i H , The youth (who) enriches his intellect with science will be useful to himself and to others. The Russian participle takes the place of two words, viz. the relative pronoun KOiop&zw, who or which, and any of the tenses of the indicative mood of a verb ; thus, instead of saying K)HOintf, KOTop&zw o6oramaew& CBOM VM& HayKflJWM, &c., it is usual to express the sentence in Russian in the way above shown.
§ 1 10. Participles, being formed from verbs, possess voices, tenses,
( S7 )
and aspects ; and, as verbal adjectives, they possess also genders, numbers, and cases.
§111. A Gerund is a verb placed in such a form as to contain a meaning which is not complete without the addition of some other verb. Ex. CMompA 6$ OKHO, OH5 JK)6yeiwca npexipSLCEbiMZ mnoMG, Whilst looking out of the window, he admires the beautiful view.
§ 112. A Gerund, being part of a verb, has voices, tenses, and aspects.
§ 113. The terminations of Russian verbs are subject to change according to their mood, tense, aspect, person, number, and gender. These changes are called conjugations
§ 114. Russian verbs have two conjugations. The 2nd person, singular number, present tense, indicative mood, of regular Kussian verbs of the 1st conjugation invariably terminates in ewi> : Ex. Tbi HHia0w&, TjAiiewb, npomam&cfl. Whereas the corresponding part of a regular Russian verb of the 2nd conjugation ends in uwb : Ex. CTOWW&, Bepiztwi&, KopMMtw&ca.
§ 115. Before considering the conjugation of the other verbs, it may be well to conjugate the auxiliary verb 6&1T&, to be.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Imperfect aspect . . 6fciTb, to be. Iterative aspect . . fowdmb, to be (often).
INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense of font.
Singular Number.
fl ecMb, I am.
TH CCH, Thou art.
OHT, ) (He-)
Ona V ecTb, 4Shev. is.
Ofld) (It, )
Plural Number.
MM ecMU, We are. «M ecx^, You are.
oil \ cyTb> They are-
Obs. — ECMB, eca, CCMW and ecie, are not in use in modern Russian.
Present Tense 0/*6tiBaTB.
fl dbiBaro, I am often.
TLI dMBaemb, Thou art often. OHT, ^ rHe
Ofla CdbiBaerb, 3 She f is often.
OH6J
It J
Past Tense o,
|
fl dr.m>, |
I was. |
|
TbI dbUT., |
Thou wast. |
|
OHT> dbm>, |
He was. |
|
Oui'i Cbi.iu, |
She was. |
|
OHO dbuo, |
It was. |
Past Tense of
a dbiBan>, I used to be.
Tbi dbiBiUT), Thou usedst to be.
OBT, dLiBfuT>, He ")
Ona dusiia, She f-used to be.
OHO dLIBliO, It J
Future Tense of
fl dyAY, I will be.
TLI dy^einb, Thou wilt be.
OHT. ^ fHe ^
Ona C dyACTT., ] She > will be.
OHO) ' Ut )
MM dwaaeM-b, BLI
OHrf
Mu dbi.m, BLI
OH^1) OH*]
MM Bu OHH
Mw 6yAenrb, BLI 6yfleie,
We are often. You are often.
are often.
We were. You were.
We used to be. You used to be.
to be.
We will be. You will be. They will be.
THE IMPERATIVE MOOD.
By4b TLI, Be thou.
IlycTb om., ona, OHO,
Let him, her, or it, be. -'
Be you
flycTb OHO, OH*, Let them be.
PARTICIPLES.
Present of CLITL Present of Past of dHTb . Past of 6binaTi. Future of dMTb
cyrqifi -aa -ee -ie, -ia,* who, or which, is, or are. dbiBdronjifi -aa -ee -ie -ia, who, or which, is, or are. dLiBinifi -aa -ee -ie -ia, who, or which, was, or were. dbiBaBiiiiu -aa -ee -ie -ia, who, or which, used to be. -aa -ee -ie -ia, who, or which, will be.
Present of duib Past of dbiib .
Past Of
GERUNDS.
dy^yie, being.
dLiBi, dbiBraa, having been.
dwBaBT>, dbiBaBfflH, having often been.
* Ancient Slavonic form, cwfi -aa -oe -Lie -wa.
§ 116. The auxiliary verb ciaiB, to become, to begin, has only two tenses, viz. the future, a ciawy, and the past, fl cia.Jff. The first of these is used in place of the same tense of the verb 6biTL (a Gy^y) : Ex. fl ciany, or fl 6y£y, nncait, I will write. The second in place of the same tense of the verb HanaiB, to begin : Ex. fl cxa^?, or fl Haiajff, nncam&, I began to write.
§ 117. The regular Russian verbs are conjugated in the follow-
ing manner :-
FORMS OF THE CONJUGATIONS.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
(Has no Tenses.)
|
ASPECTS. Imperfect .... |
TERMINATIONS. ara, ib, TH. HTb, Hb. TH. |
EXAMPLES. C ptraatb, to decide. < neib, to bake. C H6CTH, to carry. [all. C ptinuTb, to decide, once for < Hcneib, to bake through. |
|
• • Perfect of Unity . . |
HyTb. HBalb, LlIJUTb. |
(^ noneciH, to carry away, ^yeyib, to blow. ^ cxyKHByib, to knock. (. 4BBHyib, to move. ( iiaiiiiiiiaTb, to sew on. |
|
| AtJUBaib, to do. |
INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense.
|
Singular Number. a ro, y. |
» P.lural Number. |
|
|
The Present Tense has no Aspects. |
TH emb, Biiib. OBI") OHa [-...eTX, HTT>. OHO J |
Mbl CMl, HMl. Bbl 6T6, HT6. (OH* J |
Past Tense.
|
Imperfect and Perfect |
f fl, TH, QBT>...JIT>. Ona....ia. (^ Oeo... jo. |
Mbl, Bw — "^ OBH — >JLU. Ofli — ) |
|
Perfect of Unity . . |
T fl, Tw, OHT»-eyji. OHa-nyja. (_ OHo-Hy.io. |
Mbi, Bbi^ — "^ OHH — > Hy^H. Oe-6 — ) |
|
( a, Tbi, OHX-0Baji, MBa.li. |
Mbi, Bw — "^ |
|
|
Ona-iiBa.ia, LiBa.ia. C OHO-OBa^O, bIB&IO. |
Oat — ) |
( 60 )
Future Tense.
ASPECTS.
Imperfect ...
Perfect
Perfect of Unity .
TERMINATIONS.
EXAMPLES.
MM 6f flem-b
Tb, <n>, TH.
Has the same terminations as the Present Tense.
fl ey.
TM neiiib.
OHT>, Ona, OHO, ...HGTI.
MM Hesrb.
BM eeie.
OH*
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
(Has no Tenses.)
|
For the Imperfect, |
Singular Number. TbI H, b, ft. |
Plural Number. BM . . ..IITO, bie HTG |
|
Perfect, and Perfect of Unity .... |
HycTb, OHI, ] OQ5,OH6JeTll»HT1>< |
nvcib /°H9 WTI, yi^. ' (Oflt HTl, ail,. |
PARTICIPLES.
GERUNDS.
ASPECTS.
The Present Tense has no Aspects.
Present Tense.
Singular Number.
Masc. Fern. Neut. -mifl, -aa, -ee.
Plural Number.
Masc Fern. & Neut. -raie -mia.
All Numbers and Genders.
-a, -a, -yiH, -ma.
For all Aspects.
Past Tense.
Singular Number. Masc. Fern. Neut. -Binifi, -aa, -ee.
Plural Number. Masc. Fern. & Neut. -Binie, -sraifl.
All Numbers and Genders.
-BX, -inn.
Verbs which terminate in CR are also conjugated according to the above table, by adding cb or en. Ex. H saHHMaiocL, I occupy myself ; TBI nponfanBam&cfl, Thou art taking a walk ; Bbi You are laughing; OHW y#HB.iaK)wcfl, They are astonished.
( 61 )
The conjugation of verbs of the passive voice will be explained separately.
§ 118. With regard to the forms of their conjugation, Russian verbs are classed as —
(1) Regular (npaBH.ii>H&m), or such as retain the primary syllable in all their moods, tenses, aspects, and numbers, and which have, in all their parts, regular terminations, according to the ordinary rules for the conjugation of verbs. Ex. nmiiy, I write ; niiCcUtf, I wrote; Han H my, I will write ; HStacfl/z/o, I am explain- ing ; H3T>acH^&, I explained ; H3tflCH«^z», I explained once for all; jo, I will explain ; &c.
(2) Irregular (aenpaBHJtHbm), or such as do not everywhere retain their primary syllable, and which in their terminations depart from the ordinary rules for the conjugation of verbs. Ex.
me.i&, raoH^y (from H^TH, to go) ; &M5, ius, (from icm&, to eat) ; y (from 6pai&, to take) ; B3JU& and B03tMy (from B3HT&, to take) ; (from joJKHT&ca, to lie down) ; Aert and Amy (from jeib, to lie down) ; &c.
(3) Those conveying a seme of fullness (H3o6iui>H&m), or such as have in the present tense two distinct terminations conveying the self-same meaning. Ex. frmwy and wmaio, I move
and CTpad^JO, I endeavour ; ajiny and a.itfa-70, I am hungry ; and ftjLucmdjo, I shine ; w&wy and Ma^aw, I am beckoning.
(4) Defective (iieAOCTaTOHHbm), or such as have not any par- ticular tense or aspect. Ex. noHM<m& to catch, oqwym&cfl to wake up, MOABumb to utter, paHwmo to wound, which have no present tense ; or the following, which have no past or future tenses of the perfect aspect : — o6offiam& to worship, oyRuddmb to await, onacawi&ca to dread, no^paJKams to imitate, coJKa.i/&w& to commiserate, &c.
(5) Impersonal (SesjHHH&m), or such as are used only in the 3rd person. Ex. MOJKBO (it is) possible, AOJIKHO (it) should be, Kawmca it appears, ffiaj& (it is a) pity, nto (T. e. He ecib) there is not, cnumcfl one is drowsy, rofiopwmcfl it is said, xowmcfl one would like, it dawns, Moposwwff it freezes, rOBOp^ms they say, &c.
(6) Frequentative (y^amaTeJBH&m), or such as denote a certain
( 62 )
amount of continuance in the time of the action which they illustrate. Ex. noxdoicueamb to walk up and down, norjLkfibieamb to look round, &c.
§ 119. Russian verbs, according to their coastruction, are also —
(1) Simple (npocw0M), or such as have not prefixed to them prepositions or other words, and which therefore retain their primi- tive meanings. Ex. #feHCTB0<?aw& to act, HOCWW& to carry, \wumb to walk, HB.i/zm&CH, to appear generally, &c.
Compound (cAOMRbiii) , or such as have prefixed to them prepositions or other words (in some instances nouns substantive). Ex. fijiaiOTBOpumb to do good, sdoj&hciBoeamb to do evil, coxbtLCt- Boeamb to co-operate, omROcumb to take away, pascKstibieamb to narrate, yxo/pw& to go aioay, notLBAJimbcn. to make one's appear- ance, &c.
Obs. — The greater portion of the compound verbs are formed by prefixing prepositions to the iterative aspect of simple verbs. Ex. nepeffalbwamt to do over again, om&wmmb to ride away, pacKipwueamb to paint all over. Very many simple verbs, in order to form their perfecl aspect, take as prefixes various prepositions, or else borrow the perfect aspect bodily from compound verbs. Ex. nucdmb to write, ; ciaBwm& to erect, nocmBumb ; Kpacwm& to colour, ; interns to blossom, pacn.tfbcmb ; &c.
EXAMPLES OP THE CONJUGATIONS.
§ 120. Of the Regular Verls.
(1) Conjugation of Verbs of the Active and Neuter Voices : Aspects. INFINITIVE MOOD.
Imperfect . . . 4-kiarb. ciyiaib. ataib. Perfect. . . . c/CB-iarb. nociyiaTb. noJKBTb. Perfect of Unity. CTyKHyib.
Iterative . . « ^'LiLiBaib. (not used). /Kiiudib.
to do. to knock. to live. to see.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. Imperfect Aspect.
|
fl. |
A-kiaio. ciyqy. |
HJHBy. |
Dn/ny • |
|
Tbl. |
r i $'I».l(1CIIIb. CTy^IHinb. |
JKUBeUIb. |
BH4Binb. |
|
OBX, oaa, oe6. |
/ t 4'fe.iaeTb. ciyiBTb. |
HJI1BCTX. |
Bl'uilTb. |
|
Mbi. |
4't.iaOMT>. CTyiHMTi. |
JKHBi'Ml. |
BB4UMI. |
|
Bu. |
4"kiaeTe. ciyiHTe, |
/EIIBCTe. |
BB4BT6. |
|
OBB, oui. |
4'iiaiOTi. ciyqari. |
»BByTl. |
/ |
|
I do, &c. I knock, &c. |
I live, &c. |
I see, &c. |
|
|
Ay*. |
Past Tense. |
||
|
Imperfect . . . |
4-Bjaji -a -o -JB. ciyiaji -a -o -JB. |
KlUT, -& -6 -.111. |
BH,V!;.IX -a -o -JIB. |
|
Perfect .... |
CA&iarb-a-o-.iH. nociyiaji'b -a -o -JH. |
no/Ki'ui -a -6 -.HI. |
yBB4ajcb -a-o -JH. |
|
Perfect of Unity . |
n-rxTT^rnr »1L o rt MY» |
||
Iterative . . . 4i.ibiBaxb-a-o-.iH. (not used). ;i;iiBa.ii -a-o -.111. BH^biBaJT. -a -o -JH. I did, &c. I knocked, &c. I lived, &c. I saw, &c.
Future Tense. Imperfect Aspect.
Sing. Num. n 6y4T
or ciyiaTb, or atHTb,
oaa^ OHO)
Plur.Num. MM 6y46Mi -\
/ ? x
M'BJiaTb. or ciynaTb.
OBB A OHB
or ataib
I will do, &c. I will knock, Ac. I will live, &c.
or
or BH4tib. I will see, &c.
Singular Number.
lural Number.
Future Tense. Perfect Aspect.
a cjluaH). nociyiy. nosKHBy.
nociyiHuib.
Tbl
noiHiicemb.
OBI ^ oaa > oeo 3
BM
OBB OH*
I will do, &c.
nociyidiT.. I will knock, &c. I will live, &c.
yBHHty.
VBB4Hrb.
I will see, &c.
Perfect of Unity.
nil ciyKHy, -Hnib, -HTb,
-IIM^, -Hie, -yix.
I will knock, &c.
nil
nil
IMPERATIVE MOOD. Imperfect Aspect.
|
sing. Number. |
4-kiaii |
CiyiH. /K11BH. |
nil |
|
nycib |
COH?) ' s Qua /• 4'i>-iaeT'b, (OHO) |
or CTyiHrb, or JKiiBeii, |
> let him see, &c. |
|
Plur. Number. |
4-BJafiTe |
CTyiMTe. HillBHTP. |
nil |
|
nycib |
fOBM") ' |
or ciyqaTX, or »HByTT», |
Or BH48TI, |
|
do, &c. |
knock, &c. live, &c. |
let them see, «fee. |
|
|
Perfect Aspect. |
|||
|
Sing. Number. |
/ |
nociyiH. noatHBH. |
nil |
|
nycib |
< OH a > C4lJ.!aeTT>, |
or nociyqeTT,, or noffiHBeii. |
nil |
|
(ouo 3 |
|||
|
Plur. Number. |
C4li.iaHTe. |
DOciyiHTe. DoiKiiBiiie. |
nil |
|
nycib |
f OI1II *) ' \ : > C4't.iaioT'b (^ 0113 ) |
t or nociyjaTi, or noa;nByTT>. |
ml |
|
do, &C. |
knock, etc. live, &c. |
||
|
Perfect of Unity. |
|||
|
Sing. Number. |
m7 |
ciyKHH, nil |
nti |
|
C OHl ~\ |
|||
|
b < OHH ^ CTyKHCTl. (OHO 3 |
|||
|
Plur. Number. |
nil |
CiyKHiiTe. nil |
nii |
|
nyci |
knock, &c. |
||
|
PARTICIPLES. |
|||
|
Present Tense. |
|||
|
&• T f Masc. Singular \ -p. |
f |
CTyiaiqiH, a.-iiBymiii, |
|
|
**"" \ Neut. |
•fiAA |
IftAJI |
|
|
II|O^| |
|||
|
Plural f^aSC\ AT /, K t em. & 2K*«6«r. | Neut> |
mie, |
nmtn |
»»W1 f\ |
|
j |
m'fl. |
||
|
He who does, &c. |
he who knocks, &c. h« who lives, &c. |
he who sees, &c. |
|
|
Aspects. |
Past Tense. |
Pei-fect of Unity .
eTyifiimiiii, /Kiininiii, nii,vl;iiiiiiii.
a, -ee,-ie, -ia, -aa, -ee, -ie, -ia, -aa, -ee, -ie,-ia»
nr>irvaQimiiCT nr>:i;if imii i< T/OII i-fcuriT. .i
M If ' . o
Impertect • . • 4^<^iniii, ~.j .„ ,
-aa, -ee,-niie, -uiia, -aa, -ee,-ie, -ia, -aa, -ee, -ie, -ia, -aa, -ee, -ie,-ia.
*r 61*1 6 C I/ • • * . C^KowlcLBIIima nOCTy i&BUI III • II 0 ill II BIO 1 H * V BH/l'BBIIIi i» •
-aa, -ee, -ie, -ia, -aa, -ee, -ie, -ia, -aa, -ee, -ie, -ia, -aa, -ee, -ie, -ia.
nil CTyKHyBiiiifl, nil nil. •aa, -ee, -ie, -ia.
f j .
Iterative . . . A'BJLiuaBUiiii, (not used), JKHBaBiiiUi, liii^uBuifiniii,
-aa, -ee, -ie, -ia, -aa, -ee, ie, -ia, -aa, -ee, -ie, ia.
he who did, &c. he who knocked, &c. he who lived, &c. he who saw,&c.
All Numbers \ and Genders. »
Aspects. Imperfect . .
Perfect . . . Pa-feet of Unity
GERUND.
Present Tense. , doing. ciyid, knocking.
Past Tense.
C/im>. / \ aBT>.
< / CTV4 \
^aBimi, ) (aBiuH,
living.
seeing.
^aBUlH, j L ' t&BDft,
, 1 VBT), )
•A cxyKH iyBu,e,r «* »•*•
having done. having knocked. having lived. having seen.
(2) Conjugation of Verbs of the Reflective, Reciprocal and Common Voices : —
Aspects. INFINITIVE MOOD.
Imperfect . . . xsaJHibCfl, cpa/Kaibca, yjbi6aTbca.
Perfect .... noxBajHibca, cpaaHibca, nil.
Perfect of Unity . nil. nil. yjwCHyTbca.
to praise one's self. to fight. to smile.
INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense.
Singular Number. a xsajwcb, cpan;aiocb,
TbI XBaJHIHbCfl, Cpa/KaeilJbCff,
ona > xBaJHTca, cpaataeica, OHO)
Plural Number. MW XBa.in.MCH, cpaajaemca,
BM xBajHTCCb, cpamaeTecb,
OHH I f
- > xBajaTca, cpa/KaiOTCflj I praise myself, &c. I fight, &c.
yjbi6arocb. y.ibi6aenibca.
yjbi6deTca.
yjbi6aeiecb. yjbi6amca. I smile, &c.
Aspects. Imperfect. . .
Perfect . . .
Perfect of Unity Iterative. . .
Past Tense. XBajMJca, cpaiKaJCfl, yjbi6ajca,
-JOCb, -JHCb, -jaCb, -JOCb, -JflCb, -JaCb, -JOCb, -JHCb.
noxBaJQJca, cpasHJca, nil.
, -JOCb, -JHCb, -JaCb, -JOCb, -JHCb.
nil. nil.
, -JOCb, -JHCb.
nil.
XBaJHBaJCfl, l -sajacb, -sajocb, ?• nil.
-BaJHCb. J
I praised myself, &c. I fought, &c. I smiled, &c.
Singular Number.
Plural Number.
Future Tense. Imperfect Aspect.
114
OHa > 6y 000 )
Mbl 6y46Ml, Bbl 6y46T6,
OIIII OBl!
I will praise myself, &c.
or cpaJKaibca, or
I will fight, &c. I will smile, &c.
Singular Number.
Plural Number.
Perfect of Unity.
Tbl OHl}
oea > oao)
MM BU
OIIII I
OB!)
nil.
XBa.ll!Cb, r'OHT)^ < OHa > XBcUIUTCfl,
(.ono)
nycib
Pniise thyself, &c.
Perfect Aspect.
rocb, or cpaffiycb. \
or
or
noxBaiHMca, or noxBaJHiecb, or cpaautecb.
rOHX
nycn < ona
(. OHO
c ' ^ nycTL j ou| >
noxiia.uicb,
Praise thyself, &c.
till.
noxBaiarca, or cpaaaica.
I will praise my. I will fight, &c.
self, &c.
i
nil. nil. a
I will smile, &c. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Imperfect Aspect.
cpamafica, yjbi6afica.
nyctb j oua > cpaataeica, nycib j OH a > yjufiaexca. Coed) COBO)
cpaJKafitccb,
nyctb j °H!| i cpaataioTCH. nycib
Fight thou, &c.
Perfect Aspect.
cpaaiicb.
Smile thou, &c.
nycib < OHH > cpa3MTca. cpaaaiecb.
' *i ^lj cpaaaica.
Fight thou, &c.
nil.
Perfect of Unity.
|
nil. |
nil. \ f nyctb < ona > yjuoneica (oed) |
||
|
nil. |
nUi. nvn |
b | 0|J^ > yjibiOnyTca |
|
|
Smile thou, &c. |
|||
|
PARTICIPLE. |
|||
|
Present Tense. |
|||
|
") Masc. t |
-XBa^amifica, ") |
/'cpaajaiom.iaca,') |
(liuOSamnite*. |
|
S.™9' ( Fern. |
n if/ 'ii I |
\ |
|
|
< HJtlULM^ > |
-< m.aaca |
||
|
' ) Neut. ( |
/ |
||
|
1H'XL/1 5 I |
|||
|
Plur. -i Mate. i |
- jeca, •) . inpn _? |
r mieca, ^ f .--- ini af*a 1 |
C m,ieca. |
|
>• mniL/ij j |
|||
|
he who praises |
he who fights, &c. |
he who smiles, &e. |
|
|
himself, &c. |
|||
|
Aspects. |
Past Tense. |
||
|
Imperfect. |
|||
|
"} Masc. / |
'XBcLIlIBIIlifica, ^ |
r cpaataBiiiifica,) |
ry,U(5aBmific«. |
|
Num. T ) Neut. ( |
•< maaca. |
||
|
( meeca. - |
|||
|
Plur. "> Masc. JM 111H, \ Fg^ft, fy N"dUt» |
. |
||
|
( mieca. |
|||
|
Perfect. |
|||
|
~\ Masc. /'noxBajHBUiificai |
r cpaauBiniflcfl.) |
||
|
/ ITTflP/MI * |
> nil. |
||
|
^ *9 J |
|||
|
Plur. ") Masc. ( Num. ] Fern. & Neut. <• |
- • . |
«> |
|
|
I miaca. ' |
|||
|
Perfect of Unity. |
|||
|
~\ Masc. |
( yjbiOBvBiniaca |
||
|
SjTH9' }> Fern. Num. C j A/eut. |
, A |
nil. |
j raaaca. (. • meeca. |
|
Plur. } Masc. Num. ) Fern. & Neut j |
C mieca. ^ miaca. |
||
|
he who praised |
he who fought, &c. |
he who smiled, &c. |
|
|
himself, &c. |
|||
|
GERUND. |
|||
|
Present Tense. |
|||
|
All Numbers'} |
XBajacb, |
cpa>Kaacb, |
y.iuo'aacb. |
|
and Genders. / pr, |
lising himself. |
fighting. |
smilinif |
|
Aspects. |
^ f |
||
|
Att Numbers \ and Gender s.J |
Past Tense. |
||
|
Imperfect . . . |
xBaJHBiiracb, |
cpa/i;aBmnci>, |
yjbltiHy'BniHCB. |
|
Perfect .... |
( nOXBn.IHBIllIICb, ( iioxBa.uicb, |
") CcpaaHBHiHCb, ") ) ( cpaaacb. ) |
nil. |
|
Perfect of Unity . |
nil. |
nil. |
yjbi(5flyBmHCb. |
|
having praised |
having fought. |
having smiled. |
|
|
himself. |
(3) Conjugation of Verbs of the Passive Voice :—
Aspects.
Imperfect Perfect . Iterative
INFINITIVE MOOD.
6biTb xBa.iii.My, or HarpaauaeMy,
or HarpajKjeHy,
6biib
6biBaib
to be praised.
or nocbuaesiy. or
or
to be rewarded.
or nocwjaeMy. to be sent.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense.
Instead of the following antiquated method of conjugating verbs of the present tense and passive voice — fl ecMb or fl CbiBaio xBajHMi, or earpa/K4aeMT>, or nocbiiaeM'b, &c., I am praised, or rewarded, or sent, &c. — it is usual to invert the phraseology so as to convert the passive into an active form.
Ex. Mena •re6fl ero, ee
Baci
HXb
Imperfect Aspect,
or Harpa;KAaKm> or nocbuaiOTT,, &c., They praise, or reward, or send me, &c.
Pas* Tense. (Passive Form.)
Cbl.IX XBa.IlIMb,
or
or nocbuaeMi.
6bi.ia
(Ju.H) xBa.ni.Mo,
6 u.i 1 1
or earpaJK4aeMa, or nocbuaeMa. or narpa>KAaeMO, or nocbuaejio.
or Harpaat^aeMbi, or nocbuacMbi.
(Active Form.)
M6Hfl - TC6fl
erd ee
eaci
BJIC/I, IlX'b
xua.in.in,
or earpaJKAain, or nocbi.iaia.
I was praised, &c. or rewarded, &c. or sent, Ac.
Aspects Perfect .
Iterative
Aspects. Imperfect
Perfect
Imperfect Perfect .
MCH/1
xefia ero, ee
( 69 )
(Passive Form.)
6t>w> noiBa'.ieB'b, or narpaxAe'B'b, or
6bua noxBa.iciia, or Barpa/n^eiia, or noc-iana.
dbLio noxBa.ieiio, or HarpaJK^eflo", or nocjaao.
di'i.ni noxBi'uenbi, or iiarpa/K^enu, or nocjanu.
I was praised, &c. or rewarded, &c. or sent, &c. (Active Form.)
or narpaAii.iH, or
(Passive Form.)
Baci>
liX'L
TbI
OBI )
ona 6uu;'ija
Ofl6 CbiBLio XBaJUMO,
6LiBa.iH
or earpaJK^aeMi, or noctu.lOMi.
or Harpaat^^eMa, or
or Harpaat^^eMO, or nocbi.iacMO.
or
or nocu.iaeMM.
(Active Form.)
MCfia xeda ero, ee aaci
6WBa- XB3JHJH,
jio they praised,
or earpaJKAaJH, or
or rewarded, or sent me, drc.
Future Tense.
Instead of using the now obsolete form of fl 6y#y XBaJHMT>, I will be praised ; or narpaJKjaeMi, rewarded ; or nocbuaemi, sent, &c., it is usual to say Meea 6y4yi^ XBaJHTb, they will praise ; or Harpaat^aib, reward ; or no- CbuaTb, send me, &c.
fl 6yay noxBajeex, or narpaJKae'H'b, or nowaHX, &c. or MOBS, &c. noxBcUaii), or HarpaAHini, or nomji&Ti, &c.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
nycTb Mena XBa.iarb, let me be praised ; or Harpaac^aiOTi, rewarded ; or nocbuaiOT'b, sent, &c.
nycTb MGH^ noxBajaii, let them praise ; or earpa^aii, reward j «»r no- rorb, send me, &c.
Aspects.
PARTICIPLE. Present Tense.
King. Num.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Plur. ") Masc. . )
Num. ) Fem.&Neut
he who is praised, &c. he who is re warded, &c. he who is sent, &c.
Past Tense.
Sing. Num.
Plur. Num.
Sing. Num.
Plur. Num.
nil.
nil.
he who was praised, <fcc. he who was rewarded, &c. he who was sent, Ac.
AU Numbers ") and Genders- )
GERUND. Present Tense. or
being praised.
rewarded.
or nocbuaeMi. sent.
All Numbers ") and Genders. )
Past Teme.
or
having been praised.
rewarded.
or
sent.
§ 121. Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs.
The following1 Table exemplifies the manner of conjugating some of the Russian Irregular Verbs : —
Q O
O
H <
tf
UJ
p*
QOO
H «1 O
i— i
Q fc
VE MOOD
t&
i"^
e
i
3
SS
PH*
- 1 §
1g:S« * iff
8>'S •l- -
4? §
fa S
Din
Pi
0) ^
*
s » * ^
ta ta
v^^
s
«
Mi -§
** * j> SS^^-S
I -g- S a 3 1 * - I S B B S J ^1 S 1 i £ Z £ S :i « a 1 1 li 1 1 1 1 1 1 |i
- - 2 - S§ -o §
B la
S » - . v .r
. . 3 ^ S
- :
v§ ~
*o *o /^
^ (S s -e
t
P-i a
fiOQ
•«-*
a
at
V
PH
Jj
.i 0
i rre s
s ri
_= >a
H H v(B vS
-H a a1
^S
« t>- 00 G5 O rn ^ CO
00 O5 O 1-1
C 00
OS ^
0/w. — Of the irregular verbs inserted in this Table, only two are used in the Aspect of the Perfect of Unity, viz. (No. 27) Tpacta— ipaxHyib, and (No. 22) cipHib— cipHrayTb ; whereas in the Iterative Aspect the following are found: — ( No. 3) B63TB, (No. 4) BecTH — BaJKHBaib, (No. 13) HGCTH — eaiuHBaTi, (No. 23) ctib — c-BKaib, (No. 29) tcib — *,iaib, (No. 30) -Bxaib — 1>3maTb. The verb MOib (No. 12) is not used in the future tense of the Imperfect Aspect. One cannot, therefore, say H fiy^v or MLI 6y,jeMT> MOib-
§ 122. RULES FOE THE CONJUGATION OF RUSSIAN VEEBS.
For the conjugation of Russian Verbs there are many rules, but there are also a large number of exceptions to them. We will note only those rules which may be pronounced steadfast, i.e. such as admit of the least number of exceptions.
I. Rules for the Infinitive Mood.
(1) The infinitive mood of Russian Verbs of the imperfect aspect generally ends in m& preceded by any of the vowels a, e, u, o, y, w, /&, n. Ex. HHTOWb, to read ; Tepewib, to rub ; \Eduiumb, to praise; KO.IOW&, to prick; tQivymb, to sink; pbzwb, to dig; HM/&W&, to have; 3a6aBJ^m&, to amuse. We also find the same termination mb preceded by the consonants 3 and c. Ex. .i-fcawb, to climb ; rpbiswb, to s-naw ; luecwb, to plait; UBl>cwb, to bloom. A very few
f * CJ *• v
verbs have their infinitive mood in Ub and mu; such as BJC^b, to drag; Eftmu, to go (on foot).
(2) The infinitive mood of Russian Verbs of the perfect aspect likewise generally ends in mb. This termination has, however, various prefixes. Some verbs form their perfect aspect in a way peculiar to themselves —
Ex. OTJHHaw&j WJivmumb, to distinguish,
npne/zwb, to receive,
o^/fcwib, to dress.
B3H?wb, to take.
Others, in order to form their perfect aspect, take as prefixes various prepositions :
Ex. JLioftumb, nojiioftumb, to love.
uncdmb, namicdfflb, to write.
Others, again, borrow a perfect aspect from compound verbs analogous to themselves :
Ex. 6epe^b, coepe^b, to guard (which is from
the verb coeperawb). roioBWWb, nmiYOTommb, to prepare (which is from
' J X J, \
the verb nparoTOBji^wb). CMOip/bWb, rcocMOTp/btfZb, to behold (which is from
the verb riocMaipHBaTb).
•
( 73 )
(3) The infinitive mood of verbs of the aspect of the perfect of unity ends in nymb. Ex. uuTHymb, to wink; cmcuymb, to give a whistle ; jep«y>w&, to give a pull.
(4) The infinitive mood of verbs of the iterative aspect ends in ueamb and bieamb. Ex. \&s&u8amby to be in the habit of walking; vhnbieamb, to be in the habit o/" seeing ; vmieamb, to read often.
Note. — But few Eussian verbs have the iterative aspect, which can in good style and conversation be used, and therefore this aspect should be employed with great discernment. Verbs ending in ueamb and bieamb cannot have an iterative aspect. Ex. pa3CMaTpM0dwz&, to examine ; oftfabieamb, to oblige, &c.
II. Rules for the Indicative Mood.
(1) The first person singular number, present tense, has two terminations, viz. in TO and y. Before the latter there is always a consonant. Ex. Mfl,y, I go ; cna«/, I sit down. The terminations of the second person of the same number and tense are in ewb and uwb respectively, and those of the third person of the same number and tense in emu and wwff. The terminations of the first person, plural number, present tense, are eMV and UM$ ; of the second person of the same number and tense erne, ume ; of the third person of the same number and tense (of verbs of the first conjugation only) wwff or ymt. Thus it will be found that the second person of the singular number, present tense, of verbs of the first conjugation has ewb for its termination ; and so the third person of the plural number, present tense, of verbs of this conjugation will end in wmti or ymt. Ex. *in-
thou readest; ^niaTOWB, they read; zenewtb, thou leadest;
, they lead ; similarly the second person of the same number and tense of verbs of the second conjugation has uwb. Consequently the third person of the plural number will be in am$ or Ex. Momuw/b) thou art silent ; MOJHarb, they are silent ; thou gazest ; CMoip/zmtf, they gaze. Amongst verbs of the second conjugation there are two only which do not follow this rule, viz., 6feKww&, thou runnest ; 6fcry*B5, they run (not {ybmamv) ; XOIIUM, thou desirest ; XOTATH&, they desire (not XOH#W&).
(2) Verbs which terminate in the*first person, singular number, of the present tense in iy> change i in the second and third persons
( 74 )
singular, and in the first and second persons plural into OK. Ex. 6e- per?/, I take care, &c. ; 6epe#c£w&, 6epe#cem&, 6epeJK£jw&, 6epe>Kew£. In the third person of the plural number they retain the letter i ; thus, 6epe£?/»25, erepee?/m&, they watch.
(3) Verbs which terminate in the first person, singular number, of the present tense in ay, change K in the second and third persons singular, and in the first and second persons plural, into u. Ex. B.ie- Ky, I attract; VAQuewb, EAQuemfi, vHeueMti, EJieueme.. In the third person of the plural number they retain the letter K ; thus, WKymt, they cook.
(4) Monosyllabic Verbs, which terminate in umb, change
in the first person singular of the present tense into &w. Ex. numb, to drink ; mu#to, to sew ; mmb, to twine ; 6i«m&, to beat ; n&/o, U1&/0, B&TO, 6bW. To this rule the verb 6pwm&, to shave, is an ex- ception, as it makes 6p/&«>, &c.
(5) The present tense is used sometimes in the sense of the future. Ex. aaeipa H iijy BT> ^epeBH/o, To-morrow I am going to the village.
(6) The past tense of verbs of the imperfect and perfect aspects terminates in M. It is formed, as a general rule, from the infinitive mood of the imperfect and perfect aspects by changing m& into M. Ex. mnamb to read, HHia.15, xorfewft to desire, xorLf5; MHW& to knead, MLi&. When the infinitive mood terminates in ^&, the termination of the past tense is generally found to be either in K5 or tti. Ex. BJie^S to attract, B.ietf&, 6epew> to guard, 6epee5. Similarly, when the infinitive mood terminates in emu, smu, the termination of the past tense is in C5 or 3$. Ex. uecmu to bring, HCCS ;
to carry, BC3&. The exceptions are : HE^cmu to blossom, and to lead, whose past tenses are uuiutf and Be^5 respectively.
(7) The termination of the past tense of verbs of the aspect of perfect of unity is in nyM ; thus, Mnr#y?w& to work, makes
(8) The termination of the past tense of verbs of the iterative aspect is in uea,M or meaM. The past tenses of both the perfect of unity and iterative aspects are derived from their respective infinitive moods by changing mb into M : Ex. xajKW0#w&, to make a practice of going, xajKMtfdU5. Verbs which do not possess an iterative aspect replace the want of one by adding the word
( 75 )
to the past tense of the imperfect aspect : Ex. fl Obiedjo I used to meet.
(9) The future tense of verbs of the imperfect aspect is formed by prefixing the future tense of the auxiliary verb fftinib to the infinitive mood of the verb which is being conjugated : Ex. fl Gyfly xua.iww&, Tbi Gy^efflb \BcUumb, &c., I will praise, &c.
(10) The future tense of verbs of the perfect aspect has the same terminations as has the present tense of verbs of the imperfect aspect. Ex. fl /wxBcUW, Tbi /zoxBa.iww&, &c., I will praise, &c.
(11) The future tense of the aspect of the perfect of unity terminates in ny, newb, &c. It is formed from the infinitive mood of the same aspect by casting away the final letters iw&; thus,
, to move, makes flBuwy, 4BHH0W&, &c.
III. The Imperative Mood.
(1) As a general rule, only two persons of the imperative mood are used, viz. the 2nd and 3rd : Ex. HHraw read (TH, thou, being understood), nycib OHJJ, OHO- or OHO, Hnraew&, wrdume (BH), nycn> OEU or OH/& HHiaJOWtf. There are cases, however, in which the 1st person may be used ; for example, Ey£b ff 6orai&, H 6bi rcoMortf CMy, were I rich, I would assist him. In the same way, the 1st person plural of the present or future tenses of verbs of the perfect aspect is used for the 1st person plural of the imperative mood ; thus, une'Mt, kneMti, nouneMfi, nokneMV, let us go, let us eat, &c. In such instances the suffix me is frequently added to the 1st person plural of the impera- tive mood : Ex. uoftkwiuMme, chfteMme, let us run, let us sit down.
(2) Sometimes the infinitive mood is used in place of the imperative ; thus, Mo.i4am& ! He myM/6W6 ! Be silent ! Do not make a noise !
(3) In the practice of a high style of conversation or writing, to the 3rd person of the imperative mood is added the particle da ; for example, d# BCTynwrntf instead of nyciB OH5 BCTynwm»,let him enter.
IV. The Participles.
\ 123. The active participles of verbs of the active and neuter voices terminate as follows : — The present participle in i^m, ii^an, i^ee, for the masc., fern., and neut. genders, respectively. This participle
( 76 )
is derived from the 3rd person, plural number, present tense, indica- tive mood, by changing the final letters m$ into wflu : Ex. CMoipawtf, they regard ; CMOipa^m, &c., he who regards, &c. The past participle in ewitij euian, eiuee, for the masc., fern., and neut. genders, respec- tively. This participle is derived from the singular number, past tensej indicative mood, by changing M into ewiu : Ex. CMOip-Jutf, I regarded ; CMOipimm, &c., he who regarded, &c. In the case of verbs which have not the letter A in the formation of their past tense, the final letter & of that tense is changed into wiu, &c. Ex. poctf, he grew; pocwitt, &c., he who grew, &c. The past participles of the following verbs are as follows : — vecmu to lead, Be^
, to go, uiej&, medium ; nwbcmu, to blossom, rjBlu&,
, to fall, uaM, u&dwiU.
§ 124. To the terminations of the participles of verbs of the reflective, reciprocal, and common voices, the particle en is added. Ex. CMOipawmcH, he who regards ; CMOip'BBtw/MCfl, he who re- garded ; &c.
§ 125. The participles of verbs of the passive voice are derived only from verbs of the active voice. The present participle of verbs of the passive voice ends in Mbiu. This participle is formed from the 1st person, plural number, present tense, indicative mood, of the active voice, by changing the final letter 5 into &w, an, ee> (for the masc., fern., and neut. genders respectively). Ex. XBaJHMtf, we praise ; xfiaJHMbm, &c., he who is praised ; &c. The present passive participles of the following verbs form an exception to this rule : — ucKamb, to seek, ECKOMblti ; nacwm, to pasture, nacoJit&m ; Becww, to lead, sedoMbiu. The past participle of verbs of the passive voice ends in nubm or- mwu, &c. This participle is formed from the singular number, past tense, indicative mood, active voice, by chansrin^ the final letters M of that tense into HHbiu or mbiU.
DO
Ex. AiuaJtf, he made, ukAMtHbiu, he who is made ; miu&, he sewed ; w&moe, that, which is sewn; &c. The following verbs form ex- ceptions to the above rule : — XBajmw&, to praise, x.Bai£«WWU ; HOCWW&, to carry, EomeHHbiu ; npom»^&, to pardon, np6me«/f&i# ; 3a6biBft?w&, to forget, 3a6b'iw&zit and ttfieetMbiu.
Obs. — The present participle of a verb of the passive voice can only be formed by means of either of the two neuter verbs 6biBait and
( 77 )
§ 126. In the Russian language there are no other future par- ticiples than that of the verb foimb, viz. ftynyujfiu -an -ee -ie -in.
§ 127. Participles are declined as nouns adjective.
§ 128. Participles of the passive voice have both full and shortened terminations ; thus, from the full forms come the fol- lowing shortened forms : yBaJKaeM&m, -an, -oe, respected, -a -o j HHiaHH&m -an -oe, read, Hniantf -a -o.
§ 129. As a general rule, participles with full terminations are confined to writing and to books, whereas in conversation the shortened forms of such participles are more often met with. Ex. #OM& xopomo JiocTpoens, This house (is) well built ; 9ra
, This book (is) read through ; HpHKasame The order .(is) executed. In conversation are likewise used such participles as have the meaning of nouns adjective ; for instance, OHS cyWjiii pe6enoK&, He is a regular child ; panenbiM o<i>Hijep&, a wounded officer ; Henpoxo^zui&zw jfcctf, an impenetrable forest ; &c.
V. Gerunds.
\ 130. Gerunds of the present tense of verbs of the active and neuter voices end in a, H, or ynu and TOHU. Ex. CTVH& knocking, sitting, HHia/j or ^EISHOUU reading, uzuiyuu writing.
^ 131. The gerunds of the past tense of such verbs end in eft or
' ' .
emu. Ex. ciuitftf, cmxbEwu, having sat, &c.
§ 132. The first noted terminations of gerunds of either of the above tenses (those in a, a, 8$) are shortened, whereas those last noted (in yuu, wuu, emu) are full. The former are used in ordinary writing and in conversation, the latter in less refined language, or in the vulgar tongue.
§ 133. The gerunds of the present tense, like the participles of the same tense, are formed from the 3rd person, plural number, present tense, indicative mood, of the verb, by changing amv into a, and wntiiymti and wmti into a. Ex. MQJwdmtf they are silent, MOjqa ; x6^w&, they go, xo#/j; BeAywff, they lead, se^; JKCJa/omff, they wish, JKC.IEU.
§ 134. The gerunds of the past tense are formed from past
( 78 )
participles by changing the termination ewiti into ULU or 69. Ex. MO-iHaflwm, MQJL^iaewu, M0.i4a0ff, having been silent ; Hanucaewiu, or Hanmcaewu, having written.
§ 135. In the case of verbs of the reflective, reciprocal, and common voices, the particles Cb and en are respectively added to the shortened form of gerunds of the present tense, and to the full forms of gerunds of the past tense. Ex. npanact, hiding, cnpaiaffwrnct, having hidden, &c.
§ 136. To gerunds of the present tense, passive force (which are but seldom used) is prefixed the future gerund of the auxiliary verb 6bimb : Ex. 6ydyuu xsajHM5, being praised. In like manner, to gerunds of the past tense, passive voice, the gerund of the past tense of the same verb is prefixed : Ex. 6bW6 XBaieH5 or /zoxBadCHtf, having been praised.
§ 137. Gerunds have sometimes the meanings of adverbs. Ex. OHS umiuemv cmon, he writes standing, &c. Gerunds of this kind are called verbal adverbs (oirjarojLHoe
THE ADVERB.
§ 138. An Adverb is generally used with a Verb, in order to show the quality, circumstances, and mode of action. Ex. H man. miixo, I weni quietly ; OHS /TjoorpHBavicfl euepd eepxoMV, He went out yesterday on horseback. Certain adverbs are also placed before other parts of speech : — (a) Examples of those preceding nouns substantive : MHMO ipyfloffff, many labours ; HWCKOMKO coJAai5, several soldiers; esaMibtifi nenetz, in lieu of money ; eMibcmo KHHF&, in place of books. — (b] Examples of those preceding nouns adjective: OH& 6ueii9 npHjeffieHS, he is very industrious; eecbmd uoAesRaa KHHH&, an exceedingly useful book. — (c) Examples of adverbs coupled with others, in order to intensify the meaning which it is desired should be conveyed : eecbMa xopoino, exceedingly good ; ouenb 6.1H3KO, very near ; lopdsdo panie, much earlier ; e#0a npHM^THO, scarcely perceptible.
^139. According to their respective significations, adverbs are classed as follows : —
(1) Adverbs of Quality: — These denote the quality or mode of action, in answer to the questions mud ? how ? E&RUJW 66pa30.M& /
( 79 )
in what manner? Ex. fl nposoray (from npOBOHtt)aw&) Bpe.M/z xopomo, I pass time well ; Tbi Bee nkji&ewb KaKi» Hn6yvjb, Thou doest every- thing anyhow ; OHS JK)6HT5 npory.!HBam&ca rrfcuiKOM'b, He likes to take his exercise on foot j &c.
(2) Adverbs of Quantity: — (a) Answering to the question, CKO.IBKO? how much? how many? Ex. MBOFO, MOJO, nicKOJbKO, OAHaiKAbi, &c. — (6) Answering to the question, BO-CKOJBKO? how many times ? Ans. BflBoe two-fold, Bnaxepo five-fold, &c. — (c) Answering to the question, Ha-CKOJtKO ? into how many times ? Ans. Ha-ABoe in two, Ha-neiBepo, into four, &c.
(3) Adverbs of Place : — These answer to the questions — idn ? where ? Kydd ? whither ? oxity^a ? whence ? from what place ? Answers : BA^CB here, Tyrb here or there, iaMT> there, Bea^i every- where, HHr#B nowhere, r^-HHSy^b somewhere or other, Aoiua at home, Ty#a thither, cio^a hither, flOMOH homewards, oiiy^a thence, oicib^a hence, HS^a-in from afar, CHapy?KH from without. To this class of adverbs belong also certain nouns substantive, used in the instrumental case, that is, when such signify the way by which one travels : OH& rfexa^5 MopeMB n floporow 3«xBOp£U&, He went by sea, and fell ill on the road.
(4) Adverbs of Time : — These answer to the question, when? Answers: cero^na to-day, aafiipa to-morrow, Hb'mii at present, 411^5 by day, HOHBTO by night, npejK^e before, nocit after, Hacio often, piyjKO seldom, paHO early, noa^HO late, &c. To this class of adverbs belong also yiKe' already, eme still, again, Bee always, &c.
(5) Adoerbs of Precedence, such as cnepfia1 first, at first, cnaHaia first, at first sight, cnoBa anew^ onaib again, BO-nepB6?o?5, firstly, BO-BTOp&z#& secondly, &c.
(6) Adverbs of Intensity and Augmentation, such as BecbMa extremely, onenb, ropaaAO much, oiHfflKOMb too much, Kpafine to the utmost, &c.
(7) Adverbs denoting diminution or decrease, such as epa
scarcely, Hyib hardly, Haciby with difiiculty, DOHTH almost, &c.
•
(8) Adverbs denoting sufficiency : AOBOJbHO enough, DOJHO fully, that will do, enough, &c.
(9) Interrogative Adverbs, such as Kor^a? when?
( 80 }
why ? 4.ia wio ? for what ? r^t ? where ? Kyfla ? whither ? is it possible ? indeed ! &c.
(10) Affirmative Adverbs, such as no&iHHHO really, indeed, HCTUHHO verily, BT» caMOJW5 iiji/6 in fact, ia yes, TaKt so, 4'BficTBH-
V * „ J V *
T6.IBHO actually, KOHCIHO of course, &c.
(11) Negative Adverbs, such as HC no, flirt not, He lain* not so, HHKaKt by no means, HHMajo not at all, HHCKOJLBKO not any, OTHIO^B
./ f 7 J J
by no means, coBci>Mi> He and BOBCC He not at all, &c.
(12) Hypothetical Adverbs, such as no-KpaHH£M Mi»p/& at least, asocB it is to be hoped, MyiB-JH scarcely, Bp^i-JH it is doubtful whether, MOJKeT&-6BiT& perhaps, &c.
(13) Exclusive Adverbs, such as TOKMO, TOJBKO and J.HHIB only, e^HHCTBCHHO solely, KpoMt besides, &c.
(14) 'Adverbs of Comparison, such as noAo6flO like, HapaBES on a level, iaKWJW& 66pa30Jt5 in this manner, &c.
(15) Adverbs denoting disparity or dissimilitude, such as nnaqe otherwise, HanpoTMBT, on the contrary, Ha-o6oporB vice-versa, &c.
(16) Adverbs denoting partnership, such as BATBCT'B together, B0o6m.e in general, generally, aa-o^no jointly, &c.
(17) Adverbs denoting exchange, such as BM"BCTO instead of, B3aMi>H&, in lieu of, &c.
(18) Adverbs of illustration, such as HMCHHO namely, TO CCTB that is, KaKT>-TO as follows, nanpHMiptf for example, &c.
(19) Adverbs denoting suddenness of action, such as HeB3HaTiaH unawares, BHesanHO unexpectedly, BApyn> all at once, MrnoBeHHO instantaneously, He^aflHHO unexpectedly, &c.
(20) Enclitical Adverbs employed in popular speech, such as MO.IT. then, 46 said he, 4ecKaiB so to say, GHIHB then, &c.
§ 140. All Adverbs, except the qualifying (KanecTBeHHOe?), and adverbs of quantity (KO.iii4ecTBeHH0e), are called circumstantial (06- CTO/iTe.itCTBeHHO^) adverbs.
§ 141. Adverbs denoting quality, which are derived from qua- lifying nouns adjective, have degrees of comparison, as, for example, xopoino good, jymue better ; Bece^o joyous, Beceiie more joyous, Bctxi, Bece^ie merrier than all. Certain of the adverbs, too, which denote
( 81 )
quantity, place, and time, have likewise degrees of comparison, such as MEorc much, 66,ii>e more, 66.i^e ocixi more than all, SJHSKO near, (Lii'iiKe nearer, BC^XT. SJHJKC nearer than all, paHO early, paste earlier, Bci»XT» paflie earlier than all.
THE PREPOSITION.
§> 142 Prepositions indicate the relationship between objects. Ex. <&M sa CTO.I&, the pupil sat down at the table. Prepositions likewise serve to alter the meaning of the words to which they are prefixed : Ex. do-xo^s income, revenue, #-xo£5 departure, npu-\6j(6 arrival, eoc-xow ascent, Jiepe&kaxmt to alter, paSMkuamb to ex- change.
^ 143. Prepositions are classed as separable and inseparable.
§ 144. The separable prepositions require after them the oblique cases noted below : —
(1) Genitive: 6e3i>, Geao without, £ja for, pa^H for the sake of, 40 up to, list out of, OTL a way from, y at, H3i>-3a from behind, H3i>-noAT> from under.
(2) Dative: KT., KO to, towards.
(3) Accusative : npo concerning, Hpe3i>, Hepesi through, across.
CKB03b through.
(4) Instrumental : na^t, Ha^o over.
(5) Prepositional : npa near, in the presence of.
(6) Genitive or Instrumental : M&Kyjy, Me/Ki between, among.
, (7) Accusative or Instrumental: sa behind or for, no^t under, at, npe^T), nepe^i before.
(8) Accusative or Prepositional: BT», BO in, into, Ha on, upon,
against, o, o6i>; 060 about.
(9) Genitive, Accusative or Instrumental : ci, co from, with, together with.
(10) Dative , Accusative or Prepositional: no by, up to, after.
§ 145. Amongst the class of separable prepositions may be reckoned also certain adverbs of place which govern the genitive case. Ex. 6^H3T> near to, Bos-ii beside, no^i along, near, OKOJO about, np6iHBT> opposite to, MHMO by, cpe^a in the midst of, snepe^H in front of, nosaAH behind.
G
( 82 )
§ 146. The inseparable prepositions are BOS, Bbi, HHS, nepe, npe and pas. They do not alter the cases of the nouns which follow them, but they change the meaning of the word to which they are prefixed : Ex. ro^HbiH suitable, 8bfao&HbiU profitable, M-fena ex- change, nepevAna alteration, cipoHTL to build, pascTponmb to
THE CONJUNCTION.
§ 147. A conjunction serves to connect either words or whole sentences. Ex. HsaHS u IIeTp5 npniiuit, John and Peter came ; EC.IH a 6f Ay 3AOpOB5 mo npi'kty KT, Baivn>, If I am well, then I will come to you ; OH& ujiu He \6uemv ujiu He uooKemti nOMo^b MH/&, He either does not wish to, or cannot, help me.
§ 148. Conjunctions are divided into the following: —
(1) Copulative (coeAHHiiTeJbHbm), such as H and, #aJKe even, npHTOMi with this, HC TOKMO and ne TOJbKO not only, CBepxT>-TOr6 besides which, Taione likewise, JKC but, &c.
(2) Partitive (pasA'B.iiiTe.ibHbn'O : HJH and .laCk) or, &c.
(3) Explanatory (H3T>acHHTe.ibHbm) : HTothat, 6y^TO as if, B-BA'I. then, now you must know, Tor^a KaKT> whilst, TaKT> 4TO so that, TaKi) itairL as, &c.
(4) Reiterative (noBTOpHT&ibH&m) : HH-HH neither — nor, and OT4acTH partly, TO-TO now — then, &c.
(5) Comparative (cpaBiiHTe^bflbrw) : KaKT> — Tain> as — so,
cmib as much — so much, HeJKe.in than, 4iMi> — T^MI the more — * the less, Taia-JKe — KaKT> both — and, &c.
(6) Conditional (yoioBH&m) or Suppositional (npeAnoJOJKHieJb- Ebitt) : eateJiH, ec,ia if, 4To6i>i in order to, ^a6bi in order that, Kor^a 6bi whenever, TO 6bi in order that, TO then, therefore, &c.
(7) Concessional (yCTynfrreJbB&fu) : XOTS although, nycTL be it so, nycKau so be it, noJKajyfl if you like, &c.
(8) Causal (BHHOCj6BHWu) : H6o for, £ia Toro 4TO for the reason that, because, DOTOMy HTO because, &c.
(9) Antithetical (npOTHBonoj6?KHbtM) : HO but, OAflaKO how- ever, BnpoieMi. furthermore, a but, &c.
( 83 )
(10) Conclusive (aaiuiOHHTe.ibiifcw) : main, thus, HOCCM^ for this reason, Git^OBaieabHO a nd ciaio 6biib consequently, naKOue at finally, at last, &c.
To the class of disjunctive conjunctions belongs likewise the particle *JM, which is affixed to a word in order to express a question. Ex. EbUM AU Bbi BT> MOCKB/& ? Have you been in Moscow ? Tow& Ju mo 40MT> ? /* that the house ?
THE INTERJECTION.
^ 149. Interjections are exclamations1 which serve to express various feelings.
^ 150. Their classification is as follows: —
(1) of surprise : a ! axi> ! axifi ! 6a ! 6a ! ofi-JH ! is it possible !
(2) of approval : afi-ja ! Hcnojaib ! hail ! TO-TO ? 6paeo !
(3) of joy: ypa !
(4) of assurance : en-efi ! npaso ! right !
(5) of call : afi ! reft !
(6) the answer to a call : a ! acs ! HTO ! ay 1
(7) of laughter: xa ! xa ! XH ! XH !
(8) of indignation : TM>y ! oyfi !
(9) of incitement : ny ! ny-ie !
(10) those which imply a proposal : "Ha! Ha-ie!
(11) of fear : OH ! axiw !
(12) of threat : van* ! BOTL ! jo6po !
(13) of reproach : 3 ! ax't
(14) of prohibition : TCT>!
(15) of sorrow and commiseration : oxt! yBbi !
(16) of indication : BOTL ! BOHT> !
§ 151. Interjections likewise serve to express various sounds. Ex. 6yxi> ! naBT, ! xjont !
1 As such exclamations are, for the most part, mere sounds, they cannot well be represented in every instance in another language. Trans.
SECOND PART
Biopoe).
SYNTAX.
§ 1 52. Syntax expounds the rules for employing words so as to form intelligible speech.
§ 153. Speech is the expression of our thoughts by means of words.
§ 154. A short sentence expressed in words is called & proposition (npe^oiKenie). Ex. ^jKopbiciie ecib Ao6pOAi>reJb, disinterestedness *is (a) virtue ; ropjocib nopoKt, pride (is a) vice ; OHH oyflyrb 6oraibi, they will be rich ; &c.
§ 155. The proposition consists of two principal parts — the subject (noA.iejKaiH.ee) and the predicate (CK^QMOG) .
(1 ) The subject is any or everything spoken of in the propo- sition ; such, for example, as has been indicated above in § 154, viz. 6e3KopbicTie, ropAocib, OHH.
(2) The predicate is all that speaks of the subject ; thus, in the same examples, Ao6pOAi>Te.ib, nopoKt, Soraibi.
§ 156. The subject and the predicate are sometimes joined by the verb 6biT&, to be, as is seen in the examples given in § 154. The verb 6biT& in the forms of its present tense is, as a rule, omitted ; thus, ropAOdb nopoia, pride (is a) vice ; H Gi^em,,1 I (am) poor ; OHT> 6orarb,2 he (is) rich.
§ 157. The subject is, generally speaking, a noun in the nominative case. Ex. JLfbmo npomjo,3 Summer has past; Tynu saKpbUH co
1 Abbreviated form of Ot^nLifl. Trans.
2 Abbreviated form of GoraTbiU. Trans.
a Neuter form of the adjective npdui.iuB. Tram.
( 85 )
Clouds hid the sun ; &c. Other parts of speech may, however, take the place of a noun substantive as the subject. These are : — (a) a noun adjective or a participle : Ex. UoMsnoe npe^noMHTaeicfl npiai- HOMV, The useful is preferable to the agreeable ; jnuuebiu He 3awB- qaert, HTO OAHO mcmokiqee npHHaAJercfirt naMi>, The idle (man) does not perceive that the present alone belongs to us. — (b) Nouns numeral : Ex. Taint mbicnnu naiii 3a OTMHSHV, There thousands fell for fatherland ; &c. — (c) Pronouns : Ex. ff iiHffly, / write; Bmomz npn- . jejKe«<5 a mom$ Jiknhez, This one (is) diligent, but that one (is) lazy ; &c. — (d) Verbs in the infinitive mood : Ex. /fri>Jiami> Apyrii.r5 c*mcT.iHBi>i.MM ecib BeJHHaniuee CHaciie, To make others happy is the greatest happiness; &c. — (e) -Adverbs denoting time and place: CetoditH TCILIO, It is warm to-day • adrtcb Bece.io, a maMt cKyiHO, Here (it) is cheerful, but there (it) is dull. Adverbs of quantity may also represent the subject : Ex. Mnoto norfiftio H MCLAO cnac^ocfc, Many perished, and few were saved. — (/) In a few cases interjections: Ex. IIporpeMtjo ypd! There thundered forth hurrah! Pa3£aj6c& tipdeo ! Bravo resounded !
§ 158. The predicate may be — (a) A noun substantive in the nominative case : Ex. CKVK& CCT& Gojimm npa3£«w#5 Jiwueu, Weari- ness is the ailment of idle people; &c. — (b) A noun adjective or a participle, with a shortened termination : Ex. Barai, oneKynt ojibimeuz M uecmewf, Your guardian (is) experienced and honest ; &c. — (c) A verb in the indicative or imperative mood : Ex. OHT> numaemti, He reads ; HoMotu BaJHS Bort, God help you; &c. — (d) An adverb of quality : Ex. /Knib BT> TIeTep6ypr/6 npiAmuo, HO oqent dopoio, To live in St. Petersburgh (is) agreeable, but very expensive.
Obs. — In a few cases a pronoun may take the place of the predicate. Ex. fl He mbi, I (am) not thou j &c.
§ 159. The subject and the predicate are called the principal parts or elements of the proposition, to which are joined the other and secondary parts that serve to illustrate and amplify the principal parts. The secondary parts consist of the complement, the definition, and the circumstantial words.
§ 160. The complement (flono.iflHTeJi>H00) illustrates or adds to the signification of the subject and of the predicate. It may be — (a) A noun substantive in any of the oblique cases : Ex. OHT> H nntiie, He loves music and singing ; &c. — (d) An
( 86 )
adjective or a participle when either of these parts of speech stands in the place of a noun substantive : Ex. OHI jK&itert tonuMaio H cjid- 6aio, He pities the persecuted (one) and the weak; &c. — (c) A per- sonal pronoun, in any of the oblique cases, and a reflective pronoun : Ex. Mw 0}KH££U!M TC0V, We have expected thee ; OHT> AyMaert o ce6n>, He thinks of himself. — (d) A verb in the infinitive inood : Ex. OH& jiboHia uumdmb, He likes to read ; &c.
• § 161. The definition (onpe^iHTeJBHO^) points to the quality or to any of the attributes, both of the subject and of the predicate, as well as of the complement. The definition may be either an adjective or numeral, or a pronoun (except a personal, relative, and reflective). The definition answers to the question KaKoa? of what kind? HGH? whose? KOTopwfl ? which? cKOJbKO? how much ? how many ? Ex. 3a ecw 9my odmupnyw ycaAi>6y mwt 60- ^dmblu coci>AT> 3aiuaTH.n» cmo mwcHUZ py6.ien, For all this vast farm our rich neighbour paid a hundred thousand roubles ; &c.
§ 162. Circumstantial words (o6cTOflTejLCTBenH&w CJOB«) are ex- pressed by the various parts of speech in the proposition which indicate place , time, mode, and cause or object of the action : — (a) To indicate the place of action the following questions serve : rjfc ? where ? Ky/ja ? whither ? OTKy^a ? whence ? Ex. OH& 6&u& BI J%JK/& H BHAluff maM9 nany, He was in Rome, and /^er^ saw the Pope ; &c. — (o) To indicate the time of action there are the interrogatives when? Kara? how? ^o^ro-^w? how long? Ex. Ha OH& 3aHfli5 6bUi> moicdbiu dem cs ywjoo, ^o eeuepa, During the holidays he was occupied each day from morning till evening. — (c) To indicate the mode of action the questions are Ham, ? how ? KaKiuwtf 66pa30JW& ? in what manner ? Ex. OH& TpyAoica neymoMuMO, He labours j»- defatigably. — (^?) To indicate the cause or object of the action, the questions are no^eM^ ? why ? 4Jfl nezo ? for what ? aaniMt ? why ? OTHero? from which cause? Ex. Bet Boopy>K0.iHC& &j;z saiqumbi , All have armed themselves for the defence of fatherland. 06s. — From the examples here adduced it is apparent that nouns substantive are used in the oblique cases, both as circumstantial words as well as complements. The dif- ference consists in this, that the latter class of words answer to the questions Koro ? Hero ? KOMy ? K^MT. ? &c. ; whilst the former correspond with the interrogative adverbs KOivia? noHCMy? &c.
( 87 )
§ 163. Nouns substantive coupled with adjectives, when found separately in the proposition, and serving to illustrate another sub- stantive, are said to be in apposition. Ex. HeTepSyprb, eeMiKOdnnnan cmo.im^a Pocciu, ocHoBang IleTpoJMS B&IHKHJWS, St. Petersburgh, the magnificent capital of Russia, (was) founded by Peter the Great ; &c.
§ 164. Appositions (npHJOHfem'e) likewise have their own com- plements and definitions, as is apparent from the preceding example :
Pocciu.
§ 165 A proper noun, or an appellative noun, may also be used as an apposition. Ex. E(api> loanm, Tsar John ; Pfcua AMypt, River Amoor ; &c.
§ 166. Address expressed by the vocative case is sometimes found in the beginning, middle, or end of a proposition : Ex. fl OHJH^aio ie6a, Aw6e3Hbiu dpytz, I expect thee, dear friend. Introductory words, such as Cjidea Boty, Glory to God ; Kawemcfl, it seems ; MO OK ems 6\)imby perhaps, &c., are likewise inserted : Ex. Bw, Kdwemcfi, ycia./m, It seems you are tired. Neither the address nor the introductory words enter into the composition of the proposition, and can be omitted without interfering with its sense.
§ 167. The principal parts of the proposition can also be omitted. In that case the subject or the predicate will be understood. Ex. Xowy no UOAHMZ H nad^wddio 3a pa66xa.Mw, / walk along the fields and look after the works. Here there are expressed the predicates alone, the subject fi being in each case understood.
§ 168. With impersonal verbs the predicate is in every case expressed without the subject or a person ; hence the proposition itself is said to be impersonal: Ex. Moposumz, it freezes ; efbpumcn, one believes ; &c.
% 169. Propositions, according to their construction, are simple or compound. A simple proposition is confined to one sentence onlu, and consists of but one subject and one predicate : Ex. ffadejtcda ycjaoicddemz JKUSHB namy, Hope ctiarms our life. A compound pro- position embraces two or more sentences, and is therefore made up of two or more propositions : Ex. Hadeotcda yc^awddemG JKH3H& Haiiiy, Menmbi yKpawdwmti ee, a cmpdcmu coKpaiqdjomv, Hope charms our life, dreams embellish it, and passions shorten (it) ; &c.
( 88 )
§ 170. Propositions, according1 to their signification, may be principal, subordinate, and introductory.
(1) A principal proposition comprises some main idea, has its own separate senee, and does not depend on any other proposition : Eir. Moil Gpamfi, KOiopbiii He^aeno npOHSBCAent BT> o$nn.ep&i, omnpd- 6UMH ez noxodz, My brother, who not long ago was promoted to (be) an officer, has set out for a campaign ; &c.
(2) A subordinate proposition, on the other hand, depends on the principal proposition, which it illustrates, and may be joined both to the subject and to the predicate : not so complements, definitions and circumstantial words. For instance, in the pre- ceding example, the subordinate proposition is joined to the subject. Subordinate are coupled with main propositions by means of grammatical parts of speech, viz. relative pronouns, verbs in the form of participles and gerunds, adverbs of time and place, and conjunctions.
(3) An introductory proposition is not connected either with a main or subordinate proposition, and may be omitted without upsetting the sense of the passage in which it occurs. Ex. Bbi, H dyMaw, ctfopo KOHHHie fli-io, You, / think, will soon finish (your) business. An introductory .proposition cannot be placed at the beginning of a sentence : if it is so placed it becomes the principal, and what was the principal is turned into the subordinate pro- position ; thus, tt dyMaio HTO BBI CKopo KOHHHie A^O. Here H dyMaw has become the main proposition, and the rest of the sentence has been turned into a subordinate proposition.
§ 171. To a principal or to a subordinate proposition is sometimes joined a quoted proposition, comprising some lengthy passage intro- duced without change : Ex. HMnepaiopff A^eKcaH^p5 I. CKaaajg Hapo^y, "fl BCTyna/o He BparoMtf a B03Bpam.aio BaMiMHpt H ToproBjK)," The Emperor Alexander I. said to the people, " I come not as an enemy, but to restore to you peace and commerce/'
§ 172. Propositions, according to variety of expression, may be —
(1) Narrative, or such as contain the illustration of any sort of subject, or simply a tale concerning it : Ex. Meitf 6bn& HepcbLMff
H0.W5 JKUeH, HO OflHH 3aKOHbI MOIMII 6bITb OCHOBaH:eJM5 HXT>
CHaciia, The sword was the first sovereign of the
.( 89 )
people, but the laws alone could be the foundation of their civic happiness.
(2) Interrogative, or such as suggest questions : — Ex. SaniMT, npoxoAOttf MI»I 6e35 BiiiiMaHi/z MUMO TpyAo'05 36M.ieAi>.ii>ua, npo-iHBaio- m.aio norb na^t coocTBeimo/o UOAOCOJO, Why do we pass by without notice the labours of an agriculturist who pours out his sweat over his own strip of land ?
(3) Exclamatory, or those which give utterance to a cry of surprise, or of some strong feeling : Ex. ^BaAnaib ipa xpHCiiancKHXT) Ayiiib npHSbiBatOTCfl KI> HOBOU JKHSHH, HI.
CBoero 4e.iOBrfeiiecKaro ^ocioHHCTBa ! Twenty-three millions of Christian souls are called to a new life, to the recognition of their own human worth !
(4) Imperative, which express a wish, command, or pro- hibition : Ex. Haipamdcbume Aoopo/ji>Te.ib, npoceibu^dume JIO^CH, yco- eepweucmeyume BOcnmaHie, Reward virtue, enlighten the people. perfect education.
Obs. — Imperative propositions may be — (a) impressive, or those giving expression to a precise injunction. The con- struction of such entails the addition of the conjunction me to the imperative mood: Ex. uumduwe rpoMHe, read (thou) louder; &c. — (6) softening, or such as are employed in ordinary conversation and in popular phraseology. These are formed by means of the addition of the particle Ka to the imperative mood : Ex. CKaJKHffa Mflt, Prithee tell me ; &c.
(5) Hypothetical or conditional, or such as are formed by the addition of the conjunction 6bi to the past tense of a verb : Ex. Kor^a 6bi BH noaeoKOMH^HCb c/b HHMT>, TO nojK)6£in 6bi ero, Had you become acquainted with him, you would have liked him ; &c.
§ 173. Compound propositions are formed —
(1) By coupling one principal proposition with another by means of conjunctions. Ex. Ha Bora ynoBaw, a caait He iMoinaH, Hope in God, and be not careless ; &c.
(2) By coupling principal with subordinate propositions, by means of the various grammatical parts of speech (vide § 170) :
( 90 ).
Ex. HcTop?/? ecib HayKa, Koxopa^ nsoSpaiKaerb BX cBaaiiOM'b cymecTBeHHbia nepeivrliH&j BT> JKHSHH HapoflOBii H.IH rocy4apcTBi>, History is the science which depicts in a connected narrative the actual changes in the life of peoples or of sovereignties. A subordinate proposition may occur at the beginning of a sentence : Ex. JEcju ne cvyMJbewi) cmsdmb e$ HeMHoiuxz cjoedxv moio, nibMti HOJIHO cepdi^e, TO MHoro-piqieM-L io.ibKO paaBe^eniL BO^OIO c66cTBeunoe nyBCTBo, // thou canst not say in a few words that with which (thy) heart (is) full, then with much speech thou only dilutest thine own feeling with water; &c.
§ 174. Speech is formed by coupling simple or compound pro- positions possessing some connection of their own.
§ 175. Speech is either periodical or abrupt. — Periodical speech consists of several compound propositions. Ex. fl roTOBiuca 6birb TOpatecTBa BeJHKOJinHaro : HO xopJKecTBo, mjijkmioe MHOK)
Moe oJKHAauie TaKoe ate HVBCTBO, naKoe noipacajo
MOW Ayniy, Kor/ta npe^ciaBHJHCb Mflt BT> nepBbiM paai H yBMA-feji) PHMT> nocpe^H ero aanyciiBiueH paBHimbi, nor^a KO xpa>iy CBfliaro Heipa, H ociaHOBH.ica no4T> ero H3yMHTewibHbiMT> CBo^OMi. I made myself ready to be a witness of a magnificent triumph : but the triumph which I saw exceeded my expectation. .... The same sort of feeling agitated my mind when the Alps were presented to me for the first time, when I saw Rome amidst her (lit. its) desolated ruins, when I came beneath the temple of St. Peter, and remained beneath its amazing vault ; &c. — Abrupt speech consists of several simple principal propositions, coupled by grammatical parts of speech. Ex. nyBCTBO yciaiocTH Dcneajo : ciubi MOH BOSOBHOBHJHCb : ^bixanic Moe ciaJio jerKO. The feeling of fatigue disappeared : my strength was renewed : my breathing became easy, &c.
§ 176. Syntax embraces the rules : (1) of the concord (coiMa- coBame) ; (2) government (ynpasjeHie) ; (3) arrangement (pa3Ml>- meaie), of words; and (4) punctuation (npenHHame).
I. CONCORD OF WORDS.
§ 177. Concord of words signifies their regular coupling in all parts of the proposition.
( 91 )
§ 178. The most important rules under this head are the follow- ing:— .
(1) The subject and the predicate, when expressed by declinable parts of speech, agree in case, but in gender and number they may differ when the predicate is a noun substantive : Ex. KauiMb'iim Hapodti Konyroiiiiw, The Kalmucks, a nomad race, &c.
(2) When the verb 6biTb indicates a temporary condition, the predicate is used in the instrumental case : Ex. Bpaxs MOM Tor^a 6i>iM KademoMZ, My brother was then a cadet ; IlepBWtf Oyoymt nocdfbduuMu H noc.ii>AHie nepGbiMU, The first shall be last, and the last first ; &c.
(3) A predicate expressed by a verb or participle with a shortened termination always agrees with the subject in gender, number and person : Ex. /(OMT> npo^ant, the house has been sold ; AepeBH/z KyiLieHa, the village has been bought; nncLMa oiupaBjeubi, the letters have beeen despatched ; &c.
(4) Definitions agree with those words which they define in gender, number and case : Ex. MHorie flHKie napo^bi noK.iOHSK)Tca HeSecHbiMT* CB'frnbaM'i,, many wild races worship the heavenly lumi- naries; &c.
(5) An apposition agrees with its substantive in case, whilst it may differ from it in gender and number : Ex. JKejfeo, nojeafliii- wiu Meiajji), HaxoflHTCff y naci> BT> H3o6n.iiH, Iron, a most useful metal, is found with us in great abundance ; &c.
(6) When there are two nouns (an appellative and a proper) in apposition signifying one and the same object, but of a different gender and number, the predicate agrees as to these with the appel- lative noun : Ex. r6po#T> AenHbi cjaBHJca B-L ^peBHOCTH, The town of Athens was famous in antiquity ; &c.
(7) In the case of titles, such as Be.iH4ecTBO Majesty, BbicoHeciBO Highness, CBtaocTb Serene Highness, &c., the words defined by them agree with them in gender : Ex. IlMnepaiopCKoe BeiHiecTBO, Impe- rial Majesty; Baina CfiiTJOCTb, Your Serene Highness, &c. ; — but the predicates belonging to them agree in gender with the person- age to whom the title relates : Ex. Ero HMnepaiopCKoe Beji'ineCTBO H3BO.iH.rb B03BpaiHTbCfl H3i> MocKBbi, His Imperial Majesty was pleased to return from Moscow ; Ea Kopo-ieBCKoe BbiconecTBO noci-
( 92 )
Befc Bbicniifl yieGHbin saBe/jenm, Her Royal Highness visited all the high schools; Ero CfiiTJOCTt 6bi JT> 3anaTT> uijbifl AeHb BaiKHbiMii A^uaum, His Serene Highness was engaged the whole day with important business ; &c.
(8) If there are two or more substantives of different genders, and one of these is of the masculine gender, the definition will also be of the masculine gender: Ex. OHT, npiiHeci. Baivn> noebie maHbi, KHIIFH H jan^Kapibi, KynMumie no Baineiuy jKejaHiK), He brought you the new plans, books and maps bought according to
your desire.
«
(9) If two or more definitions relate to the same object, then both the subject and the predicate are put in the plural number : Ex. E'kioe H AsoBCKoe MopA naxodnmcn, BT, npe^-kiaxi, Poccifi, The White Sea and the Sea of Azoff are situated in the confines of Russia; &c.
(10) When several objects are referred to, and their general number is expressed by the pronouns ece or nuumo, the predicate is placed in the singular number : Ex. Bee eMy Hpaeudocb, ece eocxu- \UI<IJIQ ero, everything .pleased, everything charmed him ; HH npocbfibi, HH Mo.ibo'bi, HH caesbi HecHacTHbix-b — Hmmo ne MOUO ero Tponyib, Neither the requests nor the prayers nor the tears of the unfortu- nate— nothing could touch him.
(11) A separate object relating to any of two or more persons spoken of in the proposition is placed in the singular instead of the plural number : Ex. Ilocji xaKoH neyAa^H, 66a 6paia noBiciUH HOCK (not HOCM), After such misfortune, both brothers became dis- couraged (lit., hung down their noses) ; &c.
(12) The verb 6bimi) in the present tense does not always agree with the subject in number, and is sometimes placed in the singular, although the subject be in the plural number : Ex. Y Meea ecmb pibdwH KapmuHbi, I have rare pictures, &c.
(13) When the verb 6bimb in the past tense is found between two substantives of different genders, it must agree in gender with the first, and not with the second. Ex. HeipT, fout pfaoe H Bece- joe jura, Peter was a playful and merry child.
(14) When the subject is represented by the adverbs of quantity — MHO^O, much, many ; MOJO, little ; H'fecKOJbKO, some, several ; CKO4bi;o, how much, how many ; CTOJbKO, so much, so
( 93 )
many — the predicate is placed in the neuter gender and singular number. Ex. Bt> STOMT> cpaHteniii yOumo nncKOMKO o*imepOB'b, In this engagement several officers (were) killed.
(15) The words MiiojuecBio, multitude, 66.ibiima Hacib, greater part, Majiaa nacib, lesser part, require the verb or predicate to be in the singular number : Ex. TUMI. co6pdj,ocb MHomecmeo co-iAarb, There were collected a multitude of soldiers ; EoMwan nacmi) HaiUHXt TOBapnmeii npousecdend BT. o*nuepbi, The greater part of our com- rades were promoted to officers.
(16) Verbs which relate to one object must be put in the same tense and aspect : Ex. OUT. crbM 3a cio.n>, nodyMciM, nanucdjz p'fciiiHTe.ibHbiH oiBtrb H omTipdouM ero KT> npocMie-iK), He sat down at the table, thought a little, wrote a decisive answer, and sent it off to the petitioner ; — but when there are adverbs or conjunctions with the verbs, different aspects may be used : Ex. OHT. crbM aa CTO.n>, doMO AyMa.n>, nomoMZ cmaM nucamb oiB-BTb H naKoufyb omnpdeuM ero KT> npocnxeJK), He sat down at the table, thought for a long time, then began to write an answer, and finally despatched it to the petitioner.
(17) A gerund in a subordinate, ; nda verb in a main, proposi- tion must express the action of one and the same person : Ex. Ilo.iy- quBT> nucbMO, a nanucaxb OTfiirb, On receiving the letter, I wrote the answer, &c. Therefore it would be irregular to say, Cioa na ropfe, rjasa MOM Bocxnina.nicb npenpacHbiMT. BH,JOMI>, Standing on the mountain, my eyes were enchanted with the beautiful sight, — • instead of Cioa Ha ropi, a Bocxuma-ica npenpacHbiM'b BH^OMT,, Stand- on the mountain, I was enchanted with the beautiful sight ; &c.
II. THE GOVERNMENT OF WORDS.
§ 179. In the government of words are explained the various relations between the principal and the secondary parts of the pro- position.
§ 180. These relations show the dependence of one word on another, and such words are said to be governing, and governed or subordinate: Ex. IHyMT, 6ypH, o6pa30BaHie cep^ua, &c. ; the noise of the tempest, the formation of the heart, &c. Here the words and o6pri306dnie are the governing words, whilst 6ypu and fi are the governed words, or those dependent thereon.
( 94 )
§ 181. The principal rules in the government of words are con- tained in the subjoined use of the oblique cases with and without prepositions. The nominative and vocative cases being direct, do not depend on other words, and therefore are not subject to govern- ment.
(a.) Use of the Cases without Prepositions.
§ 182. The genitive case answers to the questions, Koro? of whom? iiero ? of what ? nefl ? HLH ? Hbe ? whose ? and is used —
(1) Where there are two nouns substantive in a complementary phrase : Ex. MCHH HsyMibaBbicoTa lop*, The height of the mountains astonished me; &c. A complement is sometimes used in the dative instead of in the genitive case : Ex. 3£i>cb HasHaneea ivfcfla MJbcmaMti, Here (is) noted the prices to the places ; &c. In certain masculine nouns signifying quantity, the termination of the genitive case is changed into that of the dative : Ex. H Kyinm. ny^t cdxapy n <^yHTi> ndw, I bought a pood (36 Ibs.) of sugar and a pound of tea (vide § 39). Nouns substantive in the genitive case can be changed into nouns adjective : Ex. Jyn* co.iHn,a, A ray of sun ; coJtne^Hblu JiyHT), solar ray; &c.
(2) In the case of nouns substantive derived from active verbs which require the accusative case : Ex. Vmenie noJiesuijixt muw cno- c66cTByen> KT> ofipasoedmio yMa, The reading of useful books aids in the education of the understanding ; &c. Certain nouns derived from neuter verbs also require the genitive case : Ex. BT> MHHepsuib- Hbixi. BCT04HHKaxi> npOHCXO^HTi KunibHie eodbi, In mineral sources the boiling of water takes place ; &c.
(3) In indications of quantity, measure, and weight : Ex. Y Haci> MHoto padombi a Majio epemenu, We have much work, but little time.
(4) After nouns adjective of the comparative degree : Ex. Cia- pbin Apyn> jyime Hoewxz deyxti, An old friend (is) better than two new ones ; &c.
(5) In the case of nouns adjective indicating merit, strangeness^ fullness: Ex. /[OCTOHBLIU yeavcewn, worthy of respect; n topdocmu, free from pride • OBT> iKXiyiMi. KOiue.ieKT> nojuwfl
He received a purse full of money.
(6) In the case of the numerals no.nopa, flBa, 66a, ipa,
and their compounds, such as ^ea^uaib pa, copoin, xpn, &c., the genitive case is placed in the singular number : Ex. iKxnopa py6.w,
( 95 )
1^ roubles; £ca cmo.id, two tables ; 6(5a 6pdma, both brothers; ipn KHUIU, three books; Heib'ipe cmeKJid, four panes of glass ; naib- 46CHTT. ipn codddma, fifty-three soldiers, &c. ; but with all the other numerals the genitive case plural is used : Ex. Haib cw(uo0&, BOCCML fipdmbeez, CTO cmiiKOM, Tb'icana Kumti, five tables, eight brothers, 100 panes of glass y 1000 books, &c.
(7) In the case of the numerals ^Ba, 66a, ipn, Heib'ipe, and their compounds, the adjective is used in the nominative case of the plural number, and in the same gender as that to which the substantive in question belongs : Ex. Ero mpu nocdfbdmH conuHeniH HitfijH 6o.ibffl6fi ycniiX'L, His three last compositions had a great success ; &c. In the case of all the other numerals, beginning with five, the adjective and the substantive must agree in number and case : Ex. CeMb nocxfeAHnxt coHHHeniH, the seven last composi- tions ; &c.
(8) In the case of active verbs, when their action extends to a part only of the object : Ex. 4aa MH^ denem, Give me some money. With such verbs are always understood adverbs of quantity, such as HCMHOIO, little, few ; nncKOMKO, some^ several ; &c.
(9) In the case of active verbs with the negative adverb «<?, not : Ex. fl ne Awfaw npaaAHOCTH, I do not like idleness ; &c. The genitive case is also used when the negative precedes the verb which comes before the governing verb : Ex. Tbi He XOTBlt HHiaib SiHOU KHUIU, Thou didst not desire to read this book.
(10) Active, reflective, and common verbs implying wish, expectation, deprivation, fear, danger, require the genitive case : Ex. H otceJidjo BaMi> ycnri>xa BT, BatiieM-b ffcxb, I wish you success in your business; OHT> £6.iro OKdaM naipddbi, He long expected a reward ; Bbi \iuiuuJiu Menu ydoeoMcmein BH^tib saci, You have deprived me of the satisfaction of seeing (lit. to see) you; H ona- cdiocb nowdpa a Tbi 6ouwcfi uaeodnemJi, I dread a fire, and thou fearest an inundation ; &c.
(11) The following verbs also govern the genitive case: — , to require; yjocTHraib, to attain ; croHTt, to cost ; OTB!>-
, to test ; AOMoraibca, to solicit; oi^maTbca, to obey; CTbiflihbCH, to be ashamed of ; and certain others of similar signification, v/hich answer to the questions KOFO ? Hero ?
(12) The genitive case is required after adverbs denoting place, such as 863.1%, beside ; no^-iii, near ; 6jiH3i>, near ; B,jo.ib, along ;
( 96 )
, outside ; BHyipn, inside ; cnapyjKH, on the outside ; MHMO, by ; OKOJO, near; and others after which are put the questions KOFO ? nero?
§ 183. The dative case answers to the questions KOM^? HGMy? and is used —
(1) With certain active verbs, such as no^paJKaib, to copy ; /z0MoqB, to aid ; cjyjKHTb, to serve ; yroHUaib, to please ;
to harm ; w/iyTCTBOBaib, to travel with ; &c.
(2) With certain reflective and common verbs, such as jflTbCfl, to be surprised at; pa^OBaibCfl, to rejoice at; npe/jaibcs, to give one's self up to ; MO.IHTLCS, to worship ; jKaJOBaibca, to complain to; HpaBHTbca, to please; &c.
(3) With the impersonal verbs, such as JK&ib, it is a pity ; cibiflHO, it is shameful ; xoieica, one desires ; Ha^oSHO, it is necessary ; nyjKHO, it is needful ; &c.
(4) When the complement is a personal object indicating relations/lip, friendship, enmity, &c. : Ex. Oflb MHJb dndfi, Tbi eMy dpyit, He (is) uncle to me, thou (art a) friend to him; OHT> Uempy 6oM>w6u nenpiAmejib, He is a great enemy to Peter ; &c.
(5) With the adverbs npaJH^HO, becoming; cooiB'feTCTBeuHO, corresponding to ; coo6pa3HO, conformably to ; &c.
(6) The following adverbs likewise require the dative case . BOnpeKH, contrary to ; Ha-3.i6, despite; Ha-cMtx'b, in derision of; ea-nepeKopi., in spite of; BT>-yro/ty, for the pleasure of; &c.
§ 184. The accusative case answers to the questions KOFO ? HTO ? and is used —
(1) As a complement, after active verbs without a negative : Ex. OHT» nynuM pibdnyw mmy, He bought a rare book ; &c.
(2) As a complement, after neuter verbs indicating a known distance or time : Ex. OHT. 6ijKa,n> i^Tbjyw eepcmy, He ran a whole verst ; Mbi He cnaiH ecio mm, We did not sleep the whole night; &c.
§ 185. The instrumental case answers to the questions K%MT» ? HTBMI. ? and is used —
(1) With all the passive verbs: Ex. OHT> 6bi.n> JK)6nMi» |CBMa , He was beloved by all his comrades ; &c.
( 97 )
(2) With the reciprocal verbs, followed by the preposition en : Ex. HaiiiH BoiicKa xpa6po cpajKajncs c5 Henpiaie-iflMn, Our troops bravely engaged with the enemy ; &c.
(3) With certain of the reflective and the common verbs, such as saeHMaiBca, to occupy one's self; VMbiibca, to wash one's self; ropAHTbca, to pride one's self ; Bocxamaica, to be charmed with ; .JK>6oBaTbCfl, to delight in ; &c.
(4) With verbs indicating power, management, arrangement, such as B-ia^iib, to rule ; ynpaB.i»Tb, to govern ; pacnopajKaibca, to dispose ; aaB^biBaib, to manage ; o6.iaflaTb, to possess ; pacno.iaraTB, to place ; &c.
(5) The following verbs likewise require the instrumental case : ^opoiKHTb, to prize ; JKepiBOBaib, to sacrifice ; oGiboBaTb, to abound in ; cipaAaib, to suffer ; &c.
(6) Nouns substantive derived from verbs which govern the instrumental case require that the words subordinate to them should also be in the same case : Ex. pacnopaHte'Hie UMyi^ecmeoM^, the distribution of 'property ; saBfyjbiBame dnJidmu, the management of affairs ; &c.
§ 186. The prepositional case is always used with prepositions. With the prepositional case are used many verbs answering to the questions OKOMT.? OHeMi>? BT> qeirb? npn 4eMT>? such as flyMaib, to think about ; MeniaTb, to reflect ; coiKa^iib, to regret ; ne^tunTbca, to grieve; 3a66iHTbCff, to busy one's self; xjonoTaib, to bustle ; ynpa- JKHaTbca, to occupy one's self; HaxoflHTbca, to be situated; cociOi'iTb, to consist of; &c.
§ 1 87. Certain verbs require various cases. The more frequently used of such are the following : —
(1) }Ka.i1>Tb, to pity; npocHTb, to beg; which require the geni- tive or the prepositional.
(2) yAOBieiBop/iTb, to satisfy ; noKpOBHTeJCTBOBaib, to protect ; which require the dative and the accusative. The dative when the action relates to an intellectual object : Ex. y^OBjeTBOpaib oKeJtdniio, JK)6omicm6y, to satisfy desire, curiosity; noKpOBHTe^bCTBOBaib uayxaMS H xydowccmeaMZ, to encourage the sciences and arts. The accusa- tive with a personal object : Ex. y#OB.ieTBOpHTb npocumeMi, to satisfy i\\z petitioner ; noKpoBihe.ibCTBOBaTb tftitdimxz cupomz, to protect poor orphans, &c.
' H i
( 98 )
(3) In the case of the verbs YHHTB, to teach, and oSyiaib, to train, the personal noun is placed in the accusative, and the object of the action in the dative, case : Ex. OHT> ynnrb MOIO cecmpy mysmvnby He teaches my sister music, &c.
(4) The verb c-iiAOBaib, to follow, governs the dative and the instrumental. The former, where intellectual nouns are concerned: Ex. CU1>AOBaTb dofipbiMt npuMwpaMZ H coeifanaMti, To follow good examples and counsels. It requires all other nouns to be in the instrumental case, before which is used the preposition sa : Ex. BOHHBI Cjii>Ayiorb 3a ceouMZ no.iKoeodi^eMZ, The soldiers follow (after) their leader, &c.
(5) The verbs HcnpaiUHBaib, to ask for, aaaiyjKHBaib, to deserve, HCKaib, to seek, when used in the present tense, and in the imperfect aspect of the past and future tenses, require the genitive case ; but when used in the perfect aspect they govern the accusative case : Ex. OHT, HcnpaiiiHBaerb, or HciipauiBBawn>, edmeio cowdcin, He asks, or he asked, foxy our consent ; Get HcnpocH.n>, or ncnpocHTL, ediue couid- cie} He asked, or will ask, for your consent; &c.
(6) The following verbs govern the accusative and the instru- mental cases : — npeneSperaTb, to despise ; Gpocaib, to throw ; Bep- liib, to turn ; npOMbiiiLiaTb, to cTeal ; xoproBaib, to trade; Spb'iaraib, to sprinkle.
(7) The verb y^ocioHBaib, which requires the genitive case, sometimes governs the instrumental case also : Ex. y/jociOHTb nazpddbi H Mujocmw, . to bestow rewards and favours ; Focyflapb y^ocioHJ'b ero ceouMK pasioeopoMt, The sovereign honoured him with his conversation ; &c.
(8) The verb HaSjio^aTb, to observe, when it suggests the question HTO ?, requires the accusative case : Ex. Ha6jK)AaTD nopAdoKK H iiucmomy, to observe order and cleanliness ; and when it suggests the questions aa MtMi> ? aa KtMT> ? it takes the instru- mental case, with the preposition 30. : Ex. Ha6.!H)4aTb 3a nopndKOMti H 3a uucmomow, to look after order and cleanliness.
Obs. — The rules of government, to which a verb is subject, remain the same when that verb is changed into another part of speech : Ex. OHT> flOCTHrb CBoefl i^nm, He attained his object; ^ociHraiomiH futn>Jiu, one who attains (his) object ; , the attainment of an object ; &c. But nouns
( 99 )
substantive, derived from active verbs which require the accusative case, govern the genitive, as already stated in § 182 : Ex. cipoenie doMa, Hieme Kumu, the building of the house, the reading of the book. Others, again, govern the dative, with the preposition KZ : Ex. noHieflie KZ podumeji- RMT), yeaJKeiiie KI> cmdpuiUMt, reverence to parents, respect to elders; &c.
(9) The verb Cuaro4apHTb requires the accusative case, whilst words derived from it govern the dative : Ex. fl (xiaro^apib Eota, I thank God ; fiMtiodapeme Bdiy, thanks to God; 6j,aiodapA cooeMy dhdib, OHT> yiLiamiii Bd> A<xirH, thanks to his uncle, he paid all his debts.
(b) Use of the Cases with Prepositions.
§ 1 88. The government of the oblique cases likewise depends on prepositions : —
(1) The prepositions 6e3i>, £.ifl, pa^H, #o, H3i», OTT>, y, and their compounds H3i> sa, HS'b-noA'b, always require the genitive case.
(2) Kt (KO) governs the dative case.
(3) IIpo, Hpe3T> (nepesij), coo:ib, the accusative.
(4) Ha^T>, the instrumental.
(5) Ilpn, the prepositional.
(6) The prepositional adverb Me^y (MeJKi>) requires the genitive and the instrumental : Ex. BTOT& r6po#5 JLeaJHTt Meoicdy doyxti pTbK5, or M&xcdy doyMH pnnaMU, This town lies between two rivers ; &c.
(7) When sa answers to the question KV£a? whither? it requires the accusative : Ex. 3a ptKy, 3a Mope, beyond the river, beyond the sea. But when it answers to the question idn ? where ? it governs the instrumental : Ex. 3a p^KOK), 3a MOpeMb. Likewise, when it answers to the question 3a HTO? for what? it requires the accusa- tive case : Ex. TM 6bUT» HaKa3aHT> 3a Annocmi), a OHI no^yMMJ-b uarpa/iy sa npuacycdtiie, Thou wast punished for idleness, and he received a reward for industry.
(8) When noflT> answers to the question Ky^a? whither? it requires the accusative : Ex. QHT> cte> nods depeeo, He took a seat under the tree. But when it answers to the question r^'fe ? where ?
it governs the instrumental : Ex. om> CHAtrrb nod% depeeoMV, he is sitting- under the tree.
(9) npeAT> or nepefli> requires both the accusative and the in- strumental : Ex. OHT. npe^cia^'L npedti Focyddpfi or npedti Focyddp- eMtij He presented himself before the sovereign. With inanimate and abstract objects, this preposition is more often used in the instrumental case : Ex. OHI> HBibca npedz topodoMti, He appeared before the town ; OHT> npaBt npedti ceoeio cJeibcmbw, He (is) right in bis own conscience &c.
(10) "When BT> (BO) answers to the question KVfla ? whither? it requires the accusative : Ex. OHT> nome.rb 05 no.ie, He went into the field. But when it answers to the question r^ii ? where ? it governs the prepositional : Ex. Om> ryjiaerb 05 nojn, he takes a walk in the field. The preposition BT> (BO) with certain verbs indicating promotion, bestowal of rank or reward, under any conditions what- ever, requires the accusative case of the plural number, and that case must in such instances be like the nominative : Ex. IIponaBecTb BT, 04>imepbi, to promote to (be an) officer ; HasHaHHib BT> KauAHyjaibi, to appoint (as) candidate ; &c.
(11) When na answers to the questions K\£a ? whither? iia Koro ? on whom ? Ha <n6? on what ? it requires the accusative case : Ex. OHT> oinpaBiLica Ha ocipOBT., He set out for the island ; fl Ha- AiBfOCB Ha Bamy ApyjK6y, I rely on your friendship. But when the same preposition answers to the questions rAi> ? where ? Ha KOMT> ? on whom? na He»n>? on what (implying rest)? it governs the pre- positional : Ex. Fopa Sina Haxo^HTca Ha ocipOBt CimHjin, Mount Etna is situated in (lit. on) the island of Sicily; &c.
(12) When o (061.) answers to the questions o HTO or 060 HTO ? against what? it requires the accusative : Ex. OHT> yiUH6cfl o Kaftieiib, He hurt himself against the stone. But when it answers to the questions o KOMI? about whom? o ie]vn>? about w^hat? it governs
'the prepositional case: Ex. OHI> roBOpHTT) o KaMH^ He speaks about the stone ; &c.
(13) When CT> (co) answers to the question CT> nero ? from off what? it requires the genitive case : Ex. OHT> ynaji> CT> Joma^H, He fell from off the horse. When it answers to the question CT> Koro ? like whom? CO TITO? like what ? indicating comparison, it requires the accusative : 'Ex. BeJirinnoK) CT> Jioma^b, In size like a horse? &c. When, again, it answers to the questions CT> Kt>n> ? with whom ? crb
( 101 )
? with what ? it governs the instrumental : Ex. OHT> Kyn6n> ca-HH CL JoniaABK), He bought a sledge «piM a horse; &c.
(14) When no answers to the questions no H6My ? over what? and no HeMt ? at what rate ? it requires the dative case : Ex. OHT» ryjAerB no no^y, He walks ora the floor; fl njany no py6.iib, I pay at the rate of a rouble. But when it answers to the question no HTO ? up to what ? it governs the accusative : Ex. Om> yine.n> BT> Bo^y no caMyto mew, He went into the water up to (his) very neck. When, again, this preposition answers to the question no KOMI. ? after whom ? it governs the prepositional : Ex. Ont n.ia4en> no OTirfe, He cries after (his) father. When no is used in the sense of nooit, after, it likewise takes the prepositional case : Ex. Ho CMepiH fleipa Be-iHKaro, After the death of Peter the Great ; &c.
III. THE PLACING OP WORDS.
§ 189. The placing or arrangement of words shows the order in which they should follow when used in speech.
§ 190. In the arrangement of words in a proposition, that order must infallibly be adhered to in which our thoughts succeed each other. The more closely we keep to the ordinary conversational style in the arrangement of our words, the more natural, easy, and clear, will be our expressions.
§ 191. This very style, the use of which is maintained by cul- tivated writers, comprises the observance of the following most important rules : —
(1) The principal object in our sentence should be placed first of all, i.e. first should come the subject, then the action of the subject, or the predicate, and lastly the complement : Ex. fle'ipt ocHOBa.n> HeTepo'yprL, Peter founded St. Petersburg ; &c. Speech should begin with those words which most occupy our though ts : Ex. Tpn,- HIJM CHJBHMH rpOMT., Rumbled the loud thunder; &c.
(2) Sometimes before the principal portion of the proposition the secondary parts are placed, as these serve to prepare the way for the main object of the narrative : Ex. B$ mmiu ObicoKou dunbi, na 6epeiy MocKQbi pnKu, jcjKajH na ipasi #ea MOJO^bie He.iOBiKa, In the shade of a tall lime tree, on the bank of the river Moscow, two young men lay on the grass.
(3) Where there are many definitions placed together, the following order should be observed : first the pronoun, then the
( 102 )
numeral, after these the adjective or participle, and last of all the noun substantive : Ex. Tfc ABa Si^Hbie 6paia nMiuon> xopomia CIIOCOOHOCTH, Those two poor brothers have good abilities ; &c.
(4) A qualifying noun adjective is alwa}Ts placed before a pos- sessive adjective : Ex. Eoiaman aojoiaa innara, a rich golden sword. And circumstantial adjectives are placed before both qualifying and possessive adjectives : Ex. Sdnwnee npiaiHoe oomeciBO, the local pleasant society ; &c.
(5) Cardinal numerals are placed before a noun substantive : Ex. EM^ on. po^y ceMbdecamz .ife., He is seventy years old. To merely express a number approximately, the numeral may be placed after the substantive : Ex. Einy 6n> pofly .itrb ceMbdecnmz, He is about seventy years old.
(6) Ordinal numerals are placed before cardinal : Ex. He^ebie flBa naca, the /?•<?/ two hours.
(7) From the juxta-position of cases similar in termination an irregularity, and even a confusion of expression, ensues : Ex. OUT, nOHHTa.icfl ecrbMti eoucKOMti 6nbiTHbiMT> H xpa6pbiMi> IKXIKOBOAUGMI,, He was considered by all the troops an experienced and brave leader. In order to avoid such a fault, the words must either be transposed or their cases changed : Ex. OHT» DOHHT&lca 80 eceMti eoucKrb onbii- HbiftTb H xpaSpbiMt no.iKOB04ueMT>, He was considered in the whole army, &c.
(8) Verbs should not be placed at the end of the proposition : Ex. OHT> pasHbia HayKH SHdemz, He knows various sciences. Instead of this, the sentence should stand thus, OHT. 3ndem$, &c., He knows, &c. This rule may only be departed from when the whole emphasis of the phrase is contained in the verb : Ex. ^o^pwxT. .iio^eii xedjinmti, a S-ibixT, npesupdjomz, Good people sue praised, but wicked (people) are despised ; &c.
(9) Adverbs of quality are placed before a verb when a com- plement or a subordinate proposition is attached to it : Ex. Kpbi-
OT.1H4HO DHCaXb 6aCHH, KOTOpbia, 6C3T> COMHtflia, Bbl HHTajH
pa3T>, KrwilofF wrote fables excellently, which doubtless you have read several times. But when the verb is unaccompanied by a complement, adverbs may be placed after it : Ex. KpbUOBT. nucEun. omMuno, Krwiloff wrote excellently.
(10) An adverb must infallibly be placed before that word which it qualifies : Ex. OHT, coeepuienuo KOHHH.II HOBHM nepeBoji,, He has completely finished (his) new translation, &c. If this rule is not
( 103 )
observed, and if the adverb is transposed, an altogether contrary signification will result : Ex. OHT> KOBHO.IT> coeepmeuno HOBLIH nepe- BO4T>, He has finished (his) perfectly new translation.
(11) The negative adverb ne must be placed before that word to which the negation refers : Ex. OHT> He cero^Ha 6bLn> y 6paia a snepa, He was not at (his) brother's to-day, but yesterday. The following arrangement would therefore be irregular : Oirb He 6bJ.n> cero^na y 6para a BHepa. A similar rule must be observed with all words used in the sense of adverbs. Such should infallibly be placed before the words to which they relate : Ex. HaB-fecTHie MGHS, no-Kpaihieft Mt>pi>, o SAOpoBKfe BameMt, Inform me, at least, about your health. This sentence would have a directly contrary signification were it to be thus written : H3Bi>CTi';Te, no KpaHHeii M^pi, MCHH, &c., Inform me at least, &c.
(12) In the construction of conditional or prepositional pro- positions with impersonal verbs, or with adverbs, to the conjunction 6bi is added the past tense of the verb fibimb : Ex. BaMt no-iesHO GbiAO 6bi nporyjHBaibca, It would have been useful to you to take an airing. Many offend against this rule by expressing the phrase thus : BaMT) nojiesno 6bi nporyjLHBaiLca.
(1#) The conjunction 6bi must not be used in one and the same proposition : Ex. ECJH 6bi a Tatrb KopoiKo He snaxb 6bi Bact, TO He noBipHJi. 6bi BaMT>, If I had not so intimately known you, I would not have believed you. Here the conjunction 6bi should only be inserted in the first proposition, after the word ecJiu.
(14) One and the same word should not be often repeated, especially if that word be a pronoun : Ex. OHT, Bb'iKynHJTi uxt,
B3HJ-b UX$ KT> Ce6i, KOpMHJT, UXti KaKT, C60UXV A^TeM, H OTOC^aJT> UXd KT.
pOAHTa!8MT> uxti, He bought them, took them to himself, as his own children, and sent them away to their parents.
(15) Words, the signification of which is contained in the preceding word, must not be repeated : Ex. CeiodumaHiu dem Kama pa66ia doMO npodojwajiaci), To-day's day our work was long con- tinued,— should be Cero^Ha Hama pa66ia 6bua npOflO.UKMTe,!bHa, 'I'o- day our work, &c. Such a fault is called & pleonasm.
(16) Expressions should not be turned in a way that is foreign to the Russian language : Ex. Bbi cJHiiiKOM'b eme Mo^o^bi, 4i66bi saHi'iib cio.ib BaffiHVK) ^ojJKHOCTb, You are still too young to undertake such an important duty. Such turnings of phrase appertain to the
( 104 )
French language. In Russian they should be expressed thus : BH eme TaK'L MOJOABI, HTO ne MojKeie sanm, &c. An error of this kind is called a gallicism.
IV. PUNCTUATION.
§ 192. The signs of punctuation serve to illustrate the coupling or disconnecting of propositions and their parts.
§ 193. The signs of punctuation (suant npemmaHia) are: — (1) comma, 3anaiaa ( , ) — (2) semicolon, Tonna ct aanaiOH ( ; ) — (3) colon, ABoeioqie ( : ) — (4) full stop, xoiKa ( . ) — (5) point of
suspension, MnoroToiie ( ) — (6) note of admiration, 3HaKT>
BOCKJBUaTeJBHblfi (!) — (7) note of interrogation, 3Hain> Bonpocii- Te.ibHbiH (?) — (8) hyphen, nepia or xnpe ( - ) — (9) parenthesis, CKooKa or 3HaKT> BMicTHTe.ii>Hi>iii ( ) — (10) inverted commas, ^Byaanaiaa or BuocHbiii 3eaKT> ( " " ).
§ 194. The comma is placed —
(1) Between two or more subjects and predicates which are not connected by conjunctions : Ex. BesyBiii, 9iHa H Feiua cyib orHe- Abiiuamia ropbi BT> Espont, Vesuvius, Etna and Hecla are the vol- canic mountains of (lit. in) Europe ; &c.
(2) When the following conjunctions are repeated, u, uu, ujiu : Ex. If AOJKflL. u CHf>ri>, HIJH, Both rain and snow fell, &c. ; Oflt He yM'ieii, HU MHiaib, uu nacaTb, He can neither read nor write; Bbi u*iu He MOF.IH, ujiu He xorLm aioro CAijaib, You either could not, or did not wish, to do this.
(3) When the conjunction u couples the main propositions with the various subjects : Ex. B'b TOTT, 4CHb paapasiuacb yjKacuaa 6ypa, u ripOJHBHofi ^OiK^b 3aionH.n> Muoria y^HUbi, On that day broke a ter- rible storm, and heavy rain flooded many streets. But when the conjunction u couples two principal propositions which relate to one and the same subject, the comma is not inserted : Ex. TaMT> CBH- pi>ncTBOBa.!a cMbnaa 6ypa u nponsBo^iba cipauiubia onycTomenia, There a violent storm raged and produced frightful desolation.
(4) A comma is placed before the conjunction u when the latter of two propositions comprises the result of Me first, and when after the conjunction u are understood the conjunctions noiOMy, orroro : Ex. H ceroAHa Miioro xoAHJn>j u (ommoto) ycia.n>, I have walked much to-day, and (hence] I am tired, &c.
(5) If for the conjunction u the conjunctions KaK'b H, Tain. H, can
( 105 )
be substituted, then a comma is not placed before u : Ex. Tpy^bi AO- CTdBUJiu eiay u cjaBy u cocToaaie, ( His) labours brought him loth fame and fortune, — instead of KOKV cjaey, manti u cocTOflHie.
(6) Before the conjunction ujiu, when it signifies explanation : Ex. Fe^LBeuifl, ujiu lIlBeiiuapia expand ropHciaa, Helvetia or Switzer- land (is a) mountainous country. But when EUH is used in a disjunctive sense, the comma is not used : Ex. OHT> JKC-iaxb 6bi ixait BI> FepMaiiiK) UM IlTa.iiK), He wished that he might go to Germany or to Italy.
(7) In short propositions before the conjunctions a and HO : Ex. Om> npflxoAFLTb KT> saMT>, HO BH yiKe yfcxaja, He came to you, but you had already gone away ; &c.
(8) With two or more qualifying adjectives without con- junctions : Ex. CBea6opn> ecib meepnan, ipoman, u HenpncTynnas KpimocTb, Sveaborg is a solid, imposing, and impregnable fortress. But when one of the adjectives is a possessive or circumstantial adjective, the comma is not inserted : Ex. Bnepawniu npikmnbiii BeHep"B, Yesterday's pleasant evening.
(9) Between commas are placed all the annexes of the subject and of the predicate, as also the subordinate and introductory propositions and words : Ex. Bann> ipy4i>, Kcuwemcfi, npnxo^HrL KT>
y, Your labour, it seems, approaches the end.
Obs. 1. — Participles, gerunds, the pronouns KOiopbiH, KOH, Ka- KOH, KTO, HTO, the adverbs KaKt-io, TO-eciB, HanpnM'BpT>, KpoMt, and the conjunctions HTO, Sy^TO, ecjn, TO, HejKejH-H-BMt, KpoMl), KaKt, require a comma to be placed before them, as also words which separate the subordinate from the main pro- position. If, however, a participle is employed as an adjective, and a gerund as an adverb, a comma is not inserted : Ex. ^eiOB-Bia mpydku^iitcfi He 3naen. CKVKH, The man who labours does not know dullness; OHT. MHTaen, cmon, He reads (whilst) standing.
Obs. 2. — The subject, the predicate, and the copula, are not separated by signs of punctuation : Ex. A^nbi nonphiTbi CITE- roMT., The Alps (are) covered with snow, &c. Neither are definitions or complements divided from their principal parts : Ex. BepiuiiHbi ivmornx'b A-mificKHX-b ropi. noKpuibi B^mbiM-b CHl>roMT> it jbAOMT>, The summits of many Alpine mountains (are) covered with perpetual snow and ice.
( 106 )
(10) The adverbs BO-nepBLixi, BO-BiopHXt, &c., and the con- junction HaKOHeiri, are separated by commas : fix. Bo»nep6bl£1i, BBI H3£ep)KHTe xyrb MHOFO 4eHen>, a eo-emopbixv, noTepaeie MHOFO spe- MCHH, Firstly you there spend much money, and secondly you lose much time ; JlaKone^, OHT, pimHJca ixaib Bt flepeBHK), At last he decided to ride to the village.
(11) If nouns in the vocative case are found in the middle of a sentence, they are separated by commas : Ex. Krb BaMT>, MuJocmu- 6biu locydapb, oSpamaiocL ci. npocbta), To you, dear sir, I turn with a request. But when a sentence begins or ends with a noun in the vocative case, after that noun notes of admiration will be put : Ex. MuJiocmuebiu Focyddpb ! noaBoJbie oGpaiMTbca KT. BaMi>, &c., Dear sir ! allow me to turn towards you, &c.
§ 195. A semicolon divides one proposition from another: —
(1) When its several parts have been already separated by commas : Ex. To-inb'i jKHiejea 6iffiain H3T> orHa, DOJKH pyccnie IIIJH BT>oroHb ; 04HH cnacajH JKH3Hb, apyrie HCOIH ee na jnepiBy, — Crowds of inhabitants fled from the fire, Russian regiments went into it ; some saved their lives, others sacrificed them.
(2) In abrupt speech, when the main propositions are expressed briefly, and do not depend on each other : Ex. Hpo/KurOBaTbiMH ocipOBaMH paaSpocaebi HeSo-ibmia pomn ; orb AepeBHH 40 AepeBna 6tryi5 yam ^opoJKKH ; uepKBH S^-Biorb, — In (shape like) oblong islands are scattered small groves; from village to village run narrow paths ; the churches look white.
§ 196. A colon is placed —
(1) In the middle of the proposition, before the explanation of any of the parts or appellations: Ex. MeJOB'feK'b HM-kerb naib BfliniHnx'b HVBCTBT. : apinie, c.iyx'b, BRVCI, o6oii;;iiie H ocaaanie, — Man has fire exterior senses : sight, hearing, taste, scent and touch ; &c.
(2) Before quoted or foreign words : Ex. Pyccnaa noc^OBHua roBOpirrb : " yneHbe cfiirb a neyneHbe TbMa," — A Russian proverb says : " learning (is) light, and ignorance (is) darkness/'
(3) Before a subordinate proposition, when it comprises in itself the explanation of the causes or results of the action, expressed in the main proposition, and when with this may be placed the con- junction noTOMY-HTO : Ex. OHT, yfrfcjihca BT> HeBOSMOJKBOCTH >KHTb BT>
( 107 )
craiuirfe : doxo/jbi ero YMeiibiiia.iHCb, a jy^cxo^bi yBe.!HHHBaunci>, — He convinced himself of the impossibility of living- in the capital: his income decreased, and his expenditure increased. This sentence can be thus expressed : nomoMy-umo 40x6451 ero yineiibiiiajiHCb, &c.
§ 197. The full-slop is placed —
(1) At the end of the sentence or proposition which comprises in itself complete meaning1. (See Ex. § 175.)
(2) After separate words not possessed of any grammatical bond. For example, the table of contents of books, or circulars :
0 npaeaxi) B0o6me, about rights generally, &c.
(3) With shortened words : Ex. HB. ToHHapOB'b, Ivan Gon- teharoff, &c.
§ 198. Points of suspension are inserted to mark some unexpected interruption of speech : Ex. KaKoe-io npe^HyBCTBie Mena ycipa- maeT'L .... HO, HfrrL, 310 Meiia ! Some sort of presentiment distresses me ..... but, no, it is a dream !
§ 199. A note of interrogation is placed after a question: KTO npHiiie.n>? Who has come? &c.
§ 200. A note of admiration is placed wherever a wish, command, prohibition, are indicated, and also after interjections : Ex. HCHOJHH CKOpM ! CMHPHO ! Do (it) quickly ! Silence ! Intense surprise is sometimes indicated by a double note of admiration (!!), and strong doubt by a double note of interrogation (??) .
§ 201. A hyphen is placed —
(1) Whenever any word has been omitted: Ex. SaKOHt MOH — , My law (is the) truth ; EorL-MOii man,, God (is) my shield.
(2) In the case of some unexpected change of speech : Ex. Kpsuocb — H B4pyn>, Kain> 6yAio 6bi HST. rjy60Hbi a^a, sapest-ia
6ypa — The sun was hid, and suddenly, as if from the depths of hell, began to roar the tempest.
(3) Between the speeches of two persons when they are not named : Ex. ^liM'b TH 3aHHMaeinca ? ^niaio Hciopiio KapaM3ima. — KoTopwii TOMT,? 4B^fl^^aTI)I^- With what art thou occupied?
1 am reading Karamzin's history. — Which volume ? The twelfth.
( 108 )
§ 202. Words or whole illustrative passages are placed within parentheses : Ex. MomiaH'b (6tb«ian zopd) ecib BbicoHanmaa H3t rop'L BI> Efiponi, Mont Blanc (the white mountain) is the highest mountain in Europe, &c.
§ 203. Inverted commas are placed in order to distinguish quoted or foreign words that are used in the sentence : Ex. EKaiepima Biopaa CKaaaia : " .lyHine npocii'iTb #ecaTb BHHOBHbixt H^MT. HaKaaaib ojfloro HeBHimaro." Catherine II. said : " It is better to pardon ten criminals than to punish one innocent person." &c.
THIRD PART.
enie nipeiie).
ORTHOGRAPHY.
§ 204. Orthography treats of the regular use of words in writing.
§ 205. The chief rules of orthography consist in the proper use of letters and of separate words, and in the correct division of syllables.
^ 206. Letters, according to their delineation, are capitals (npOHHCHaa) and linear
USE OF CAPITALS. § 207. Capital letters are written —
(1) At the beginning of each sentence.
(2) After a full stop.
(3) After a colon when inverted commas appear in the pro- position : Ex. CyBopOBT> oififriajT. : " H anaio KyiyaoBtf, a Kyiy30B& 3HaeiT> Meim ;" — SoovorofF answered: ' ' I know Kootoozoif, and Kootoozoff knows me."
(4) After notes of interrogation and of admiration, if the meaning of the sentence is finished : Ex. Tbi Hiqeiiib fiipuaro
( 109 )
CHaciia ? Dost thou seek true happiness ? Il^eMi Ha BparoBT> ! Let us go against the enemy !
(5) At the beginning of every verse.
(6) In nouns relating to the Divinity : Ex. Eon>, God ; Co3AaTej&, Creator ; HpOBH/rfiHie, Providence ; &c.
(7) In the names of Saints: Ex. AnocTO.n>, Apostle; HpopoKT,, Prophet ; IIpe^Teqa, Forerunner ; &c.
(8) In Proper Names: Ex. AjCKcaHflpt, Alexander; Mapi>a, Mary; «/I6HAOin>, London ; ^H^np-i^Dneiper; BesyfiiM, Vesuvius, &c.
(9) In adjectives employed as proper names : Ex. PoccificKaa Hinnepia, Russian Empire; lepnoe Mope, Black Sea, &c.
(10) In various words used in the sense of proper nouns ; such, for instance, as the names of ships, of streets, of bridges, &c.
(11) The name, patronymic, and title of the ruling Emperor, and of the whole of the most august House are written in full, in capital letters: Ex. EfO IIMIIEPATOPCKOE BEJHqECTBO
His Imperial Majesty the Sovereign Emperor Alexander, Son of Alexander, &c. Likewise the adjectives which refer to the Sovereign : Ex. BhlCOqififflltt, Most High, &c.
Obs. — The initial letters only of the names and titles of foreign ruling personages are written with capital letters : Ex. Ero MMnepaTOpcKoe H Kopo^eBCKoe Be^MHeciBO IhinepaTOp-b Tep- MaHCKiH H KopoJL IIpyccKiH BnjbreJibMT), His Imperial and Kingly Majesty the German Emperor and Prussian King William, &c.
(12) In pronouns relating to the person of the Emperor and of his House : Ex. Ef6 BEJIiqECTBO, BO BpeMs npeSbiBaHia Cfioero BI> I(apcKOMT> Ce^i'fe, nOBeirfejn> AOCiaBiiTB Kt HeMy OT^CTLI, His Majesty, during his stay at the Royal village, ordered (them) to send reports to him, &c.
(13) In letters and business papers all titles — like Knast, prince; rpa^t, count; 6ap6m>, baron— ranks, names, and offices, when a person is indicated by such : Ex. Feaepai^ <$eJBjM&pmaxi. KHH3b BapaTHHCKiM, General Field-Marshal Prince Baryatinski; Kaim.iepT> KnasL FopHaKOB'B, Chancellor Prince Gortchakoff, &c. In the same way when addressing persons of these ranks : Ex. Bame
( no )
Cmie-ibCTBO, Your Serene Highness; Ero IIpeBocxoflHTe.!bCTBo, His Excellency ; Ero Ejaropo^ie, His Honour ; Ero IIpeocBamencTBO, His Eminence ; and the complimentary designations used in writing : MibocTHBbiH Tocyflapb H Focno/tnH'b, Dear Sir and Mister, &c. For the sake of politeness, pronouns which relate to the second person are put in capital letters : Ex. fl npocfLTb £ac$ o ^ocxaBJieeiH MH-fc BauiHX'b ruaHOBT), I asked you regarding the furnishing to me of your plans.
(14) The initial letters of adjectives relating to God and His Saints: Ex. BceBbiiuia, Most High; BceduBHbiH, Most Mighty; IIpenoAoSHbiM, Reverend ; &c.
(15) The initial letters of the designations of governments and tribunals: Ex Focy^apCTBeeHbiH CoB-irb, State Council; Dpa- Bi'iTe.ibCTByiomiM CeHarB, Executive Senate; KaHqaiapia MaHHCTepcTBa BHyipeHHHX-b fr^Ai*, Chancellory of the Ministry of Home Affairs; &c.
( 1 6) The initial letters of the titles of scientific and educational institutions : Ex. AKa^eMJa HayKi, Academy of Sciences ; Mnnepa- .lorHHecKoe OomeciBO, Mineralogical Society; FopnbiH HHCTHiyi'L, Mining Institute ; &c.
Obs. — The rules in clauses 11, 12, 15 and 16 are observed in petitions and in business papers generally.
(17) In the initial letters of the titles of books: Ex. Ilvie- mecTBie Bonpyrb CBirra, Travels Round the World ; &c.
(18) In the initial letters of the names of festivals : Ex. CBtuoe BocKpeceme, Easter Sunday; BjaroB^meHie, The Annun- ciation ; POJKACCTBO XpHCTOBO, Christmas Day, lit. Birth of Christ.
(19) In the initial letters of the names of orders : Ex. Op4eflT> no£BH3KH, Order of the Garter ; &c.
(20) In the initial letters of the characters in fables, &c. : Ex. OflHaiKAbi Je6eAb, PaKi>, H myKa, &c., Once upon a time a swan, a lobster, and a pike ; &c.
USE OF SMALL LETTERS.
^ 208. Rules for the use of the letter a : — Nouns ending in o, 140, M^e, and M^e, have, in the nominative and accusative cases of the plural number, a : Ex. BOHCK# armies, OKH# windows, CTCHM^ glasses, persons, cepAUrt hep"ts, y4H.inm# schools, 3piunmtf spectacles—
( 111 )
not BOHCKM, OKHbij &c. The exception to this rule is HOJOKO apple, which makes a6.!OKM. But all the diminutive nouns ending in KO and i^e have u, bi: Ex. sepHbiuiKO grain, plur. sepiibiiiiKH. mirror
§ 209. The letter 3 in the prepositions BOS, H3, HH3, pas, before the letters K, a, T, x, u, H, ill and m, is changed into c : Ex. BOCKjinuaHie exclamation, BOcnHTaiiHHin> pupil, Hcipeoirrb to destroy, HCXOAT> exodus, ncEvkienie cure, H£4e3aii> to disappear, nponiuecTfiie occurrence, ncmnnaTb to pinch.
§ 210. The letter i is written before vowels and before the semi- vowel u : Ex. npiflmoe HSB'icrie pleasant news, jKapiuH iiojib hot July, &c. Before a consonant the letter i is written in the word M?'pT> universe, and in all words derived therefrom — Ex. M/pCKOfi world, BCCM/'pHbiii universally, B.iaflHMfl'p'b Vladimir, &c. — in order to distinguish them from the word MMpT>, peace, and its derivatives. In foreign words adopted in the Russian language, after the letter u, is written u, and not bi : Ex. iiw4>pa cipher, Me^HU^Ha medicine, and not iw<i>pa and MCAimbma, although in such instances the pronunciation is the same.
§ 211. Although in the terminations of the diminutive and caressive nouns the form of the letter e is preserved, it is pro- nounced like u. Instead, therefore, of writing UBrfeTO4WKi> blossom, is written, &c.
§ 212. The double letter en is found at the beginning of the following words only, and their derivatives : CHaciie prosperity, CHerb account, cnacLiMBbiH fortunate, «eciiaciflbiH unfortunate, pas- cnerb calculation, CHHiaib to count, &c.
§ 213. Rules for the letter ij : — This letter is found at the beginning of two radical words only, viz. lixaib (I^AHTb) to ride or drive, tab to eat. It occurs in the beginning or the middle of the following words and their derivatives : —
' A. oo.rfianb, disease.
April. 6P*ro (from Cpaib), I shave.
6tci, demon.
6tcHTb, to drive mad. diineHCTBO, madness. 61>raTb, to run. C^a, woe.
poor.
B.
Cect^a, conversation. 6ecl54Ka, summer-house. 6.iii,iMLiii, pale.
poverty. 6'B.ibiii, white.
cataract (in the eye). sturgeon.
B.
to meet. to know. , to taste. knowledge. Bl>40MOCTb, intelligence. B'E^bMa, witch. B'E/iUHBOCTb, politeness. news.
, &c., confession. eyelids. B'EKO, eyelid. century.
eternal. , eternity. Etna, Vienna. fitiiciVb, crown.
B'EiioK'b, wreath. B'BHHKT), broom. BliHO, dowry. B'fcpa, faith.
, &c., to believe. to weigh. Btci>, weight. B-BCIJ, scales. B'EniaTb, to hang.
HO B'BCHTb, ditto.
aaatca, curtain.
verandah. branch. wind. to announce.
, &c., to inform. , &c., to visit. pole.
BliJl'l'b, tO blow.
Biepi, fan.
r.
Fj'fedT), proper name. retBi, anger.
bay (colour). nest. ropijKH, a game. rpaMOT-Bii, learned man. sin.
A-
, Dneiper. , Dneister.
armour. 4-BBa, virgin. to put.
, to put on.
H3ji>BaTbCH, &c., to mock. , grandfather.
ie, action. 0, business. e, act. , to divide. onpej-BJHTb, to define. pa34l;,iHTb, &c., to separate. A"BT0, children.
at.
glands. iron.
3.
aastca, curtain. aaM^iauie, observation. 3iinaBl>c'b, curtain.
b, commandment.
b, shyness. ie, eclipse. axb, to project. 3Bt34a, star,
SB-fipb, wild beast.
/ 3Mtfl, serpent.
Sp^JbiM, ripe. 3tBT>, mouth.
stBUTb, to yawn. 3l>aiJija, eyeball.
Indian. , turkey.
K
a, cripple. room.
cage. knee. , strong.
( 113 )
, left. , healer.
b, to cure. (These two words are sometimes spelt with e instead of H», but the latter is more regular.)
t, to cuddle. , idleness. HTb, to plaster. , absurd.
, magnificent.
., forest.
j-Biiiiii, forest imp. jl>3Tb, to climb.
j-ECTHHija, staircase. JiTO, summer.
H
Me4B-B4b, bear (from Bt^an, to know, and MeAT>, honey). Mtflb, copper. WE.!!), chalk. Mima, exchange. nepeMtea, alteration. a, &c., treason. measure.
e, hypocrisy.
yM-EpeeeoCTb, &c., moderation. HTb, to knead. cio, place.
aib, to insert, eaM'BCTHHKi, viceroy. ), month, or moon. b, to mark.
to remark. b, to make a mark. ), fur.
, to mix. , mixture. Miraaib, to impede. DOM-BmaTejbCTBO, folly. noM-fcxa, &c», obstacle. oKi), sack.
burgess.
H
na4t.flTbOH, to hope.
intention.
eacji4CTBO, inheritance. nac'CKosioe, insert. bride.
, daughter-in-law, or sister-in-law.
, week. eira, indulgence. et4po, womb. Htatnufi, tender. Hiiwani, proper name. HtMecii, German. H'EMo'fi, dumb. Htxx, no, not.
O
OoptiaTb, to find.
H3o6ptTdTi>, to invent.
npiotiptiaTb, to acquire. 06*41, dinner. o6i4Hfl, mass.
06tTT), VOW.
pi'omise. ., hut. answer.
, captivity. , mildew. , bald. no6-B4a, victory. DOB'ET'b, district. nojiao, log of wood.
, Monday. b, to visit. npHB'ET.iHBOCTb, affability. , example. , sweet (not salt). ntrifi, piebald. ntHa, froth. ntHfl, punishment.
, denarius (a coin). song.
yxii, cock. nixoia, infantry. iiliiiiiii, pedestrian.
, pawn (in chess).
pt4Kifi, rare.
, radish, piaaib, to cut.
npoptxa, slit. p'E3Bbiii, playful. ptSHoii, carved. p1>K£, river. P'tna, turnip. p-ECHHija, eyelid, ptib, speech.
Haptiie, dialect. ptmHTb, to decide, ptraeio, sieve.
ptme'TKa, grating. , to pour forth.
b, reed, pipe, i, ferocious. cnt>;i;iii, fresh.
CBliTT), light.
cirtTi'iTb, to illuminate. CBlJia, candle.
npocfliuieHie, &c., enlightenment. CJCBAT>, track.
to follow, i, &c., last. c.i'Iiiiuii, blind, b, laughter.
I, to laugh. CMliuiiioii, &c., laughable. CMtia, estimate. CH'fir'b, snow. cdstCTb, conscience.
advice, lie, doubt, b, neighbour.
to hasten, arrow. CTBHa, wall, clraepx, north. c'h^Jo, saddle.
CtCTb, tO Sit.
ctAHHa, greyness (of hair). c*Mfl, seed, a, vestibule, cover.
b, to shade, cieo, hay. cipa, sulphur.
ctpuft, grey. ctTOBaib, to lament. c-BTb, net. C^ib, to flog, ctaib, to sow.
Te-itra, cart. T-BJO, body. T*eb, shade. Ttcebift, narrow.
CTECHHTb, &C., to Crowd.
T"ECTO, dough, liraeib, to amuse, yiixa, amusement.
to convince. , district.
bread.
stye (for animals), xptex, horse-radish.
, flower.
to blossom. , flute. , to draw off. to heal. , &c., to cure. Hli.ib, mark.
, to aim. to kiss. , whole, price. , chain, itt, clinging.
, &c., to cling to. , to grow stiff. >, flail.
H
man.
Words which have the letter /b retain it in all compound and derivative words : Ex. siipa, faith ; BtpyK), I believe ; fiipK), I trust ; BijpHbifi, faithful ; BipiiocTb, fidelity ; yfiipeHJe, assurance ; yB'fepefl- HOCTb, confidence ; noB-fepeHHbiH, agent ; Bipoarie, probability ; 40- CTOBijpHbiH, authentic; jerKOB'fepHbin, credulous; cyeflipie, super- stition ; &c. Two words only do not follow this rule, viz. HafliaTbCfl, to hope, and OAiiBaTb, to dress ; from which come HafleaMa, hope ; and OAea^a, clothing.
The letter /& is written in the syllable «/6, which is prefixed to pronouns and adverbs : Ex. H/&KTO, W/&HTO, «/&KOTOpbiH, «/6CKOibKO, WftKor^a ; but the word Henor^a, want of leisure, is written with e.
In the following instances the letter /& appears at the end and in the middle of words ; —
(1) In the dative and prepositional cases of nouns substantive terminating in a and a : Ex. Giyr/6, to a servant ; o cy^fc/S, about a judge. Excepting those nouns which end in in : Ex. Pocciff, which has Poccin and o POCCIH, &c.
(2) In the prepositional case of nouns which end in u, 5 and & of the masculine gender : Ex. BT> IIOKO/&, in peace ; npa CTOJ/&, at a table ; BT> OFH/&, in the fire. Also in the prepositional case of nouns which end in o and e : Ex. Ha OKH/&, on the window ; BT> noj/6, in the field, but those ending in ie take u ; thus, BT» HMimit*, in possession; o ptiiie- mu, about the decision.
(3) In the comparative and superlative degrees which terminate in ne and Tbtiwiu : Ex. CBfa/se, CBi>T.i/6HiiiiH.
(4) In the numerals O^H/&, AB/&, 66/6, ^B/bHa^uaTB, #B/&CTH. In the first and third of these examples the letter /& appears in all the cases.
(5) In the dative and prepositional cases of the pronouns H, TLI, ceoa ; thus, MH/6, ie6/6, o ce6/6.
(6) In the instrumental case, singular number, of the pronouns
KTO, TITO, TOT'B, BeCb ; thus, K/6MT., H/bMl, T76MT>, BC/6MT>.
(7) In all the cases of the plural number of the pronouns TOTB and Beet.
(8) In the nominative case, plural, of the fern, form of the pronoun of the third person : OHa, <mi.
(9) In verbs, the first person of the present tense of which ends in ibto, the letter n occurs in all the tenses and moods, except of 6pHTb,
to shave : Ex. CM^TB, to dare, CM/&K), CM/MT>, CM/&H. And likewise in all words derived from these verbs : Ex. CM/&JOCTL, CM/MMH, CM/&Jb- HaK'B, daring, bold, bold fellow, &c.
(10) Except the three verbs, vMepeib to die, xepeib to rub, nepeib to push, and its derivatives, sanepeifc to lock, ownepeib to unlock, all have Tb instead of e before the termination m& of the in- finitive mood : Ex. CMOip/Sib, XOT/&TB, BHA/&TI>. These verbs have also Tb before the terminations M of the past tense, indicative mood : JSk. CMOTp/6,n>, xoT/£jn>, BHA/6JH.. The participles and gerunds, and also all words derived from these verbs, likewise maintain the letter rb : Ex. B6^/6Bniiw, #BHA/&BT>, BHA/Sme, npmvtHbRie, npomw'bme.
(11) In the adverbs B634/&, BH/&, rfl/&, 40KOJ/&, 40TOJ/&, 3A/&cb, K.POM/&,
EblR/b, OTCOI/&, nOAI/b, BnOJH/6, B03.I/&, BnpaB/&, BJl/&Bfl>, BCKOp/&, HaKa-
Hyn/6, HaeAHH/6, DOCJ/&. Likewise in nouns adjective formed from these adverbs : Ex. BH/6iimiH, 3Aft>iimiH, hblBfbilBift, &c.
The letter /& also appears before it in the terminations of the following nouns — Afi^/Sfi, A.I6KC/6H, Cepr/&H, Maie/Mi, rpaMomii, and in the derivatives of the verbs 4/b.iaib and ATbficTBOBaib, such as
\ 214. The letter Tb is not written in the following cases :—
(1) In the middle of words, after the letters r, K, x, JK, H, m, m, except in the case of the two pronouns K/&MT> and (i/bMT>.
(2) When the letter e is pronounced like e (iio or o) : men, n^ej-b. Exceptions : — Substantives : rH^a^a
Verbs : oop/6ai>, and ijB/6.n>, and their compounds
(3) In the designations of races, terminating in ne : Ex. Gia- , Slavs ; PoccL&Mtf, Russians ; ApM««£, Armenians ; &c.
(4) In foreign words received into the Russian language ; — except Anp/tab, April ; B/6Ha, Vienna ; and their derivatives.
Obs. — In order to avoid mistakes in the use of Tb in words wherein the letter e also occurs, it should be observed that w represents the sound on which rests the accent : Ex. .iej/6flTb, to fondle ; ie.itt>ra, eart ; c/Sfiep'b, north ; lI/&Mem>, German ; JK6JI/&30, iron ; nepeM/&Ha, change ; &c.
§ 215. The Greek letter Q appears only in the beginning of the following Russian words: 9& ! #Ton>, #XT>! aKoii, ^iaKT>, (?'raKOH, and
in the beginning and middle of foreign words introduced into the Russian language : Ex. $xo, 0KBaTOpi>, 3K3aMein>, 0Taan>, noaMa,
UOdTb, &C.
§ 216. The letter <9, in pronunciation like $, appears in words introduced into Russian from the Greek : (Ex. A0HHbi Athens, GepMoniLibi Thermopylae, &c.), and also in words taken from the Latin or the French. In such it stands for th : Ex. 9c6»6pb Esther, 0e#oprb Th(3odor, 00Ma Thomas, &c.
§ 217. The letters 5 and & mark the distinction in the pro- nunciation of those words ending either in the one or the other. The former gives a hard articulation : Ex. cmi5 table, iiiecTS pole, Mai& mate; but the letter & gives 'a soft utterance: Ex. cmi& so much, so many, iflecT& six, MaT& mother. The semi-vowels & and & after the sibilant letters 5K, H, ill, m, mark no kind of distinction in pronunciation : Ex. HOIKS knife, pOJK& rye, M6H5 sword, TC4& to flow, KaMbims reed, Mbiui& mouse. In such cases it must be observed that all nouns of the masculine gender take 5 after the sibilant letters above enumerated : Ex. pyoeara border, jyqg ray, iuK>45 key, epaH5 doctor, madams hut, ruams cloak, ri JK)m& ivy, &c. The same remark applies to the patronymic nouns: Ex. HfiaHOBuqs, MiixaiiJOBHH&, Herpeses, &c. But nouns of the feminine gender terminate in & : Ex. poJK& rye HOHS night, nyCTOHi& waste ground, noMom& aid. After the u in the middle of a word, 6 is not written : Ex. daughter, xo'/na point, stop, ne^Ka oven, nTH*/Ka bird, &c.
§ 218. The letter 5 occurs in the genitive case, plural, of nouns ending in a, o, and up : Ex. cjym c^yrs, OKHO OKOH&, y inhume Y4iLiHm5; likewise in the same case and number of the following words : — Tbica^a TbicaHS, cajKen& caaiees ; and in certain cases, singular and plural, of the masculine and neuter forms of the pronouns Hauitf and Bains.
§ 219. The letter b occurs —
(1) In the infinitive mood of active and neuter verbs: Ex. CMOTpf)T&, 6i>raT&. Likewise before the suffix en in reflective, reciprocal, and common verbs : Ex. XBa.iHT&Cfl, cpaiKai&ca, HaA'taT&ca.
(2) (a) In the 2nd person singular of the present and future tenses, indicative mood, of active and neuter verbs : Ex. BMAUIII&,
; — (6) in the 1st and 2nd person singular, and 2nd person.
plural, of the present and future tenses of reflective, reciprocal, and common verbs : Ex. XBajibc&, XBajHiu&ca, XBajHiec&, &c.
(3) In the 2nd person of both numbers of the imperative mood : Ex. ociaB&, ociaB&ie, &c. Exception : perfect aspect of the verb .IOJKHT&CH, .iurb, which in the 2nd person plural of the im- perative mood makes jrarre.
(4) Words taken from foreign languages, after the letter A have & : Ex. A-i&nbi the Alps, aj&rb (musical term alto), 6pfu&/fHTi» brilliant, &c.
PROPER USE OF SEPARATE WORDS. § 220. The negative adverb He is written separately —
(1) Before possessive and circumstantial adjectives : Ex. ue pyccKia, ne SCXIOTOH, He a/jimma, He BHepanmiH, &c.
(2) Before numerals : Ex. ne o^HHt, He BnepBbiH, &c.
(3) Before the pronouns : Ex. He OHT>, He Hann>, ne TOTL, &c.
(4) Before verbs and adverbs: Ex. ne BHHCV, He jK6Jan>, ne , He jKCJaa, &c.
§ 221. The negative adverb He is written conjointly —
(1) With nouns adjective, and adverbs of quality: Ex. HeGoraibiH poor, weBeceJbiH sad, weSoraio poorly, «esecedo sadly.
Obs. — If adverse conjunctions precede adjectives or adverbs of quality, the negative adverb He is written separately : Ex. He 6oraibiH HO CWTHWH o6i>Ai>> not a rich, but a copious dinner; OHO xoifl He Bece.io HO no^esflO, although (it is) not cheerful, yet (it is) useful.
(2) With participles: Ex. «03aBHcamiii ^dependent, W^BHJKHMMM mmoveable, &c.
(3) The negative adverb He is written conjointly with words which either have no signification of their own, as Hexyrb sickness, «(?JK)AHM1> misanthrope, w^qeciHBbiK impious, w/naBHCTt hatred, «6jHacibe bad weather; — or else an altogether different meaning, as WtfuapiiHeHHbiH unutterable, /^npaB^a untruth, it is not true, KiopUT&U enemy, «<?noKopHOCiUb disobedience.
§ 222. The particle HU is written conjointly only with the following words : /mKio, wwKaKOH, Hnixk, wwKy^a, /mKaKt, WMKor^a. In all other instances it is written separately : Ex. HH CKOJbKO, HH Majo : OHT> ne yM^en* HU HHiaib HU DHcaib, he can neither read nor write.
§ 223. When the prepositions aa, no, Ha, H3i>, CT>, BT> are joined with other parts of speech, and thus form adverbs or conjunctions, they are written conjointly with the word to which they are joined : Ex. 3#H'i>M'b, sarkMt, rcoioMy, /royipy, /^npHM-fep-b, /faKanynii, the day before ; ^ciapn, of old ; cnaHaja, CHHay, ceepxy, <mn3^, ffBepxy, tfnpaBO, trnpoHeMT., WflKOfleivb, &c. But if these prepositions do not form adverbs or conjunctions, and govern some one case or another, then they are written separately : Ex. 3a rfeMT> ca/jOMT. Hamt flOMt, Our house (is) behind that garden ; IIofiAy no TOMy 6epery, I will go along that bank ; CMoipa na npHM'fep'b 466pbixt TOBapnmeu, Look to the example of good companions; OHT> yixajt co BctMt CBOHMT. ceMewcTBOMT., He went away with his whole family ; &c.
§ 224. The conditional conjunction, 6bi (6i>) is only joined in the two following instances : HTO£W, #a6bh In all others it is written separately : Ex. H npHffle.n> 6bi KI> BaMT,, eoin 6bi ninijt BpeMff, I would have come to you if I had had time.
§ 225. The copulative conjunction ate (JKT>) before various parts of speech is written separately : Ex. TOTL ace, OAHaKO ate, HTO HTL, HAH JKe, CMOipn ate. It is also written separately in the comparative conjunction Tain, ate: Ex. PnMjflHe 6b'un TaFb ate cxiaBHbi, KaKi> H rpeKH, The Romans were as famous as the Greeks. But in the case of the copulative conjunction Tanase it is not separated : Ex. fl TaiOKe ObUT, BT> IleTepro^i, I was also at Peterhoff. The word Toate, when it implies uniformity, is written conjointly : Ex. fl Toase noi^y, I likewise will go. But when it is used as a pronoun it is written separately : Ex. OHT> TO ate OTB-fenaJi, Mnij HTO H BaMX, He answered me the same as he did you.
COPULATIVES.
§ 226. A hyphen is called a copulative (anaia coe^HHHTeJbHbiH), and it may serve to connect two or more separate words : Ex. TeHepai'b-a^'biOTaHTi, General Aide-de-camp ; ^ifoHK physico-mathematical.
§ 227. Copulatives may connect —
(1) Two nouns substantive: Ex. IeHepa.n>-<i>e.ibAMapuia.rb, O'fHijep'b, General Field-Marshal, superior officer, &c.
(2) Two adjectives : Ex. CfjBepo-AMepHKaHCKie niiarbi, North- American States. Likewise adjectives with substantives : Ex.
,, Lower Kamtchatsa, &c.
( 120 )
(3) Numerals with adjectives : Ex. Tpexij-yroJLHbiH, tri- angular, &c.
(4) Prepositions with various parts of speech, i. e. when such a union forms an adverb: no-pyccKH, in Russian; no-6paTtiiii, after the manner of brothers; no-MoeMV, in my way; BO-Biopbix'b, secondly, &c.
(5) Compound prepositions, such as H3t-3a, HSt-no^T., &c.
(6) The conjunctions TO, .1660, with various parts of speech : Ex. KTO-TO, KaKoH-io, rfli-TO, KTO-.iH&'o, Kor£a-.iH6o.
§ 228. Copulatives, or hyphens, serve also to connect words which are disjointed by being carried on from one line to another, and of this mention is made below.
DISJOINTING OF WORDS.
§ 229. In carrying on words from one line to another, the following rules should be observed : —
o
(1) To carry on regular syllables: Ex. 6.ia-ro-pa-3yM-Hbiii ne-.io-BTiK'B, discreet man.
(2) In compound words, or those made up with other parts of speech, to disjoint their component parts: Ex. LJapb-rpaj'b, HOB- ropoA'B, Boc-xoflt, MOpe-xoAi., orL-fe^L, &c.
(3) Words of one syllable cannot be carried on from one line to another: Ex. rpo-MT> (rpOMt), CTpa-cn> (opacTb), BOJ-KT, (BO.IKT>),
(4) One letter only of polysyllabic words cannot be transferred to another line : Ex. apiui-a,
CONTRACTION OF WORDS.
§ 230. Contracted words must end ordinarily in a consonant : Ex. HMJI npnj. (npH.!ara>re.ii>Hoe), MVJK. poA., MBOJK. IHC.I., ^aT. 034.
§ 231. The following comprise the more commonly used contrac- tions: — r. (rocnoAHHt), r-JKa(rocnoaia), M. r. (MIIJOCTHBEIH rocyAapb), nanp, (HanpHMtpt), T. e. (TO CCTL), H npOH. (H nponee), n.T. 4. (H Tain> 4ajie), H. T. n. (H TOMy noAoSfloe), c. n.6. (CaHKTnerepo'yprb), no P. X. (no PojKyjecTBTi XpHCTOBOMi.) , OTi> C. M. (oTi, CoTBOpenifi Mipa),
BM. (flMtCTO).
THE END.
r^; -^
' ' ^$ -. ' \ r *
'
sag ^
X
,-
«-"
^;
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
Do not remove
Acme Library Card Packet
Under Pat. "Ref. Index File." Made by LIBEAEY BUEEAU, Boiton
. H tr1
^
ff ~
M
to tn
tt »?> H
O ® »-J t^
03 tO
v^
• i
A\
fl' /
f^fi